Pipework Design
User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited
Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.
1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.
1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.
1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.
1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.
All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.
The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.
The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall
not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results
from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.
AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom
Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.
AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).
The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
Pipework Design User Guide
Revision Sheet
Date
Version
Comments / Remarks
September 2011 12.1.1
Split pipe with assembly tab incorporated, Fabrication Manager,
Position and Orientate added.
January 2012
Copyright added to all pages.
August 2013
12.14
September 2013 12.1.SP4.1
Offset added to position control windows.
Updates to Pipe Fabrication and Isometric Drawing nonstandard branch connections incorporated.
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Design User Guide
Contents
Page
Pipework Design
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Guide Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Pipework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Pipework Specific Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Default Pipe Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Insulation Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Tracing Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Pipework Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Pipe Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Create Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Branch Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Define Head and Tail Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Define Head and Tail Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
New Branch Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Position and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Move Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Drag Move Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
i
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Non-standard Branch Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13
Connect Existing Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
Create New Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:16
Isometric Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:19
Pipework Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Component Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Routing Pipe Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Connect Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Connect Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Pipe Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Assembly Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Pipe Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Dataworld Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6:10
6:11
6:12
6:16
Standard Model Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Import Pipe Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Quick Pipe Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Slope
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Pipe Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Defaults
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Define a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Define Head and Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Create Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:5
Routing Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:18
Positioning and Locking Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:19
Create and Use Routing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
Routing Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:27
Create and Use Routing Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Create and Use Pipe Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:35
Pipe Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:43
Import a P&ID File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:46
Automatic Pipe Routing Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:47
Create and Edit Routing Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placing Pipes on Racks and Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Syntax. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Router Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
ii
8:62
8:69
8:80
8:87
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Hole Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Check and Output Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Modify Pipework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Disconnect Pipe From Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Reconnect Pipe to Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
Modify Basic Pipe Process Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Modify Branch Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
Pipe Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Pipe Specification Modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Pipe Component Bore and Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:6
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:7
Highlighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:7
Modification Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9
Choose a Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:13
Multiple Component Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:14
Branch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:14
Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:16
Slope
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:21
Branch Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:22
Slope Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:23
Orientate Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:28
Orientate Leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:29
Orientate Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:29
Orientate Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:30
Pipe Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
Elements to Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:3
Modify Elements to Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:3
Spilt Pipe Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:3
Splitting Pipes with a Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:4
Split Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:11
Split Pipes into Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:13
Component Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:15
Feature Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:17
Split Pipe by moving Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:18
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
iii
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Merge branch/pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:22
Pipework Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Database Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Database Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Prepare the Site for Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Inspect the Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure the Pipe Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insert Shop and Field Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Spool Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13:3
13:3
13:4
13:7
Pipework Spooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7
Spooler Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:8
Create Spool Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:8
Number the Spool Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:10
Check Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:13
Spool Shipping Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:14
Modify > SPLDRG Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:14
Modify > MTO Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:15
Changing the Shop/Field Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:15
Spool Break at a Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:16
Modify > Design Plotfile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:17
Modify > Attached Welds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:18
Display/Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:19
Isometric Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:21
Preview Isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:21
SPOOLER Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:21
Spool Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weld and Joint Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Welds and Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13:22
13:22
13:22
13:23
Special Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Shop Flag Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Leave Tubes of Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Welds for OLETs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Pipe Piece and Pipe Spool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
PML Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Pipe Piece Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:25
Pipe Piece Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:25
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
iv
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Piece Pseudo Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:26
Pipe Spool Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:27
PML Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Spool Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Spool Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Spool Methods (not implemented) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Spool Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipe Spool Pseudo Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13:27
13:28
13:28
13:28
13:28
13:29
13:29
Pipe Spool Reporting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:29
MTO
............................................................
Assembly Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bending Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Welding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spool Extents/End Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13:29
13:30
13:32
13:33
13:33
Production Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Pipe Piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Pipe Spool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Pipe Production Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:2
Setup Production Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:4
Default Fabrication Machines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Auto-Resolve Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Define Auto-Naming Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stock Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating Spools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run a Production Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14:4
14:4
14:5
14:6
14:6
14:7
Individual Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:17
Group Renaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:18
Automatic Flange Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:19
Fabrication Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:19
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BendingMachineResult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WeldingMachineResult. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BendingTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BendActivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WeldingTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14:20
14:22
14:23
14:24
14:25
14:25
Database Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:25
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
v
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
FMWL - Fabrication Machine World Top Level Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMGRP - Fabrication Machine Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMBEND - Fabrication Machine - Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMBPLN - Fabrication Machine - Bending - Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMBDIM - Fabrication Machine - Bending - Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMBSST - Fabrication Machine - Bending - Springback/Stretch Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMWELD - Fabrication Machine - Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FMWSK - Fabrication Machine Welding - SKEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14:25
14:26
14:26
14:26
14:26
14:27
14:27
14:27
Automatic Flange Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:28
New Attribute for PTCA, PTAX, PTMI, PTPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Pseudo Attributes for Branch Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
New Datacon Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14:28
14:28
14:28
14:29
Pipe Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Drawing Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Backing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:3
Tables
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:4
Styles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:7
Common Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:8
Log Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:9
How to Define Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:10
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:11
Tags
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:12
Defaults
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:13
Preview Isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
Pipe Isometric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
System Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:2
Isometric Drawing Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:3
Preview Isometric Drawing Window Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:4
Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Choose Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
Default Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Force Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
vi
17:2
17:3
17:3
17:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Save and Restore Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3
Pipe Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:3
Fabrication Machine Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:3
Optimisation Criteria for Bending and Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:20
Galvanisation Tank Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:21
Weld Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:22
Modelling Consistency Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:27
Threaded Ends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:28
Defaults
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:32
Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:36
Assign Bending Machine Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:37
Fabricated Pipe Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:44
Modelling Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:49
Spooling and Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:54
Weld Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modify Spool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spool Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabrication Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Galvanisation Tank Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18:55
18:58
18:68
18:71
18:84
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:85
Pipe Spool Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:86
Fabrication Isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:89
Installation Isometrics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:92
Export Fabrication Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:93
Pipe Sketch Backing Sheet Admin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:94
Create Backing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:94
Position and Populate Backing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:97
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
vii
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
viii
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Introduction
1
Introduction
The Pipework application is supplied as a module within the AVEVA PDMS suite. The
application is a powerful suite of facilities designed by piping engineers for piping engineers,
for creating, analysing and documenting logically interconnected piping networks.
1.1
Assumptions
The Pipework Design User Guide has been written for users familiar with piping design
practices, who may or may not have prior knowledge of PDMS.
It is assumed that:
1.2
•
Users have a valid PDMS licence and the software has been installed
•
Users know how to launch the DESIGN module
•
The user is familiar with the basic Graphical User Interface (GUI) features.
•
Users are familiar with Pipework design practices.
Guide Structure
The Pipework Design User Guide is divided into the following sections:
Introduction
introduces pipework application and summarises its scope.
Pipework
describes how PDMS stores the design data in the hierarchy and
how to organise the pipework data. summarises the database
hierarchy which PDMS uses to store piping design data.
Pipework Toolbar
gives a general overview of the main design facilities provided
within the pipework application.
Pipe Element
describes the creation and main features of a pipe element
(starting point).
Branch Element
describes the creation and main features of a branch element.
Pipework
Components
describes the creation and main features of a pipework
component and the build up a piping sequence component by
component. (Also includes: Pipe assemblies which can be
created from fixed configurations of components for reuse in a
design).
Quick Pipe Routing
describes the quick facility of automatically routing pipes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
1:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Introduction
Pipe Router
describes the facility of automatically routing pipes and details
the administrative aspects of the facility.
Pipe Penetration
introduction to pipe penetration and hole management.
Check and Output
Design Data
describes the checks made for errors and inconsistencies.
Modify Pipework
describes how can be modified in terms of component
specification and bore size.
Pipe Splitting
describes how pipework splitting is carried out and the main
features associated with it.
Pipework Spooling
describes how pipework spooling is carried out using the
SPOOLER module and SPOOLER module reference
information.
Production Checks
describes the pipe piece and pipe spool production checks. It
includes fabrication machine data and pipes piece and pipe
spool data for use in pipe production checks.
Pipe Sketches
describes the creation and administration of pipe sketches. For
more information, refer to Draft User Guide.
Preview Isometrics
describes the basic isometric plot, which can be produced easily
with the Pipework Application.
Work Area
Introduces the work area for the Pipework Application.
Pipe Fabrication
describes pipe fabrication functionality for use in pipe production.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
1:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework
2
Pipework
To enter the Pipework application from the DESIGN module, click Design > Pipework from
the main menu bar.
Note: The Pipework application can be entered direct from the Login screen. Refer to
Getting Started with Plant for further information.
2.1
Design Features
The Pipework application allows the user build up and detail complex piping networks by
selecting components from the Piping Catalogue.
Using standard default settings, a conceptual layout can be created and analysed rapidly,
leaving the design details to a later post-approved stage.
2.2
Hierarchy
All database elements are owned by other elements, therefore elements must be created in
a strict order, see figure below.
The following database elements are common to all DESIGN disciplines:
•
World
•
Site
•
Zone
For more information on the generic hierarchical structure and the PDMS design database,
refer to Getting Started with Plant.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
2:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework
2.2.1
Pipework Specific Hierarchy
Below the zone level in the Pipework application, the Pipework specific elements are:
Pipe (PIPE)
•
The Pipe (PIPE) element(s) are administrative and can own a number of branches with
a common default pipe specification and have any number of ends (refer to Pipe
Element).
Branch (BRAN)
•
The Branch (BRAN) element(s) own a section of pipe (made up from piping
components) with a known head and tail (refer to Branch Element).
Piping Component
•
The Piping component element(s) are owned by Branch elements. These components
dictate the shape and geometry of the pipe work. Piping components can run from the
head to tail of the owning branch but can also be connected to other branches (for
example - a tee component), refer to figure below and Pipework Components.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
2:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework
2.3
Default Pipe Specification
All the piping specifications available in the Catalogue are shown in the Default
Specification window and therefore all the piping components available to the user from
the Catalogue are determined by the currently selected default pipe specification.
To avoid having to specify the specification again for each component, the Default Pipe
Specification can be set at Pipe or Branch level which will be used automatically at lower
levels unless it is changed (the default pipe specification is said to be cascaded down the
hierarchy).
Click Set Default Pipe Specification from the Pipework Toolbar to display Default
Specifications.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
2:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework
The user can choose from the list of default specifications, along with the insulation and
tracing specifications.
For example:
2.3.1
A1A
ANSI class 150 carbon steel
A3B
ANSI carbon 300 carbon steel
F1C
ANSI 150 class 150 stainless steel
Insulation Specification
The Insulation Specification does not necessary have to be selected at this point.
2.3.2
Tracing Specification
The Tracing specification does not necessary have to be selected at this point.
Once the selection has been made the default specification is shown in the pipework
toolbar.
Note: To change the default specification for individual components or branches, refer to
Pipe Specification Modification.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
2:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Toolbar
3
Pipework Toolbar
The Pipework toolbar gives the user quick access to all the tasks associated with the
creation and modification of Piping.
Depending on the selections made from the Pipework toolbar, the user will be presented
with further windows prompting for user input and options allowing for the workflow to
continue.
The toolbar for the Pipework application is automatically displayed in the top left hand
corner of the screen, once the pipework application has been entered.
Default Pipe
Specification
Displays the Default Pipe Specification window.
Show pipe creation form
Displays the Create Pipe window.
Show pipe modification
form
Displays the Modify Pipe window. Refer to Branch
Element for further information.
Show pipe component
creation form
Displays the Component Creation window.
Show pipe component
selection form
Displays the Component Selection window.
Delete range of piping
components
Prompts the user to identify start/end of range selection to
delete.
Align selection/
component
Aligns the selected component or selected contiguous
Components, to be aligned with the Arrive and Leave
directions of the Branch legs they are within.
Direct selection/
component
Aligns the selected component to the next/previous
component within the route, where possible.
Create
non-standard
branch connections
Connects pipes to components (such as elbows, reducers,
valves and so on).
The user will not be able to make any selections from the piping toolbar if the correct
database hierarchy has not been configured beforehand. For example certain piping
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Toolbar
elements must reside below other elements in the database hierarchy (an overview of the
database hierarchy is described in Hierarchy).
If a particular piping element cannot be created at the current position in the database
hierarchy the user will receive an error message summarising the problem, for example in
the following window an error explains that the element the user is attempting to create must
be below an branch element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
3:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Element
4
Pipe Element
Referring to the Piping Hierarchy, the first task that the user should perform using the
Pipework toolbar is to create a Pipe Element in the Design Database.
Before creating a Pipe Element the correct Database elements should already be present in
the Design Explorer, i.e. a World, Site and Zone should exist. If this is not the case, refer to
Getting Started with Plant for a detailed explanation of creating these standard elements.
4.1
Create Pipe
To create a Pipe element, click Show pipe creation form from the Pipework Toolbar to
display the Create Pipe window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Element
To create a new Pipe Element make sure the correct Zone element is selected in the Design
Explorer.
In the Pipe Name box, input the name of the new Pipe Element (the default name is PIPE).
By default the Primary System is No System, to change the type of primary system select a
system from the Primary System drop-down list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Element
By default the specification selected in Default Pipe Specification will be used but the user
can select an alternative specification from the Select Pipe Specification list for individual
Pipe Elements.
Note: All Piping Components later created below the branch will use the Specification
selected in the list. To use different specifications within a pipe run, a new branch
must be created at each point a different specification is used.
The Bore specifies the nominal bore and does not affect the pipe route (the default is
unset).
Select an Insulation specification, if no insulation is required (the default is None), select
None.
Select a Tracing specification, if no tracing is required (the default is None), select None.
Note: If a new insulation and/or tracing specification is required, refer to the system
administrator.
In Temperature, enter the temperature to which the pipe will reach (the default is 10000degC, this means that the temperature will be ignored).
In Pressure, enter the pressure to which the pipe must withstand (the default is 0pascal).
The Slope Ref specifies the slope reference attribute (the default is none). To change the
slope reference attribute, select a slope reference from the Slope Ref: drop-down list.
Click Apply, to create a new Pipe and Branch Element in the Design database and display
the Modify Pipe window, to define the branch, refer to Branch Element.
A pipe and branch element has now been created in the design database.
Click Cancel to discard input and close the Create Pipe window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Element
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
4:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
5
Branch Element
A branch owns a section of pipe made up from piping components with a know head or tail.
The user must define the position of the head (starting point) and tail (finishing point) of the
branch by either explicitly entering the position or by the selection of piping components
(such as tees) or equipment nozzles for the head or tail to connect to.
The Modify Pipe window is automatically displayed once a new pipe element is created.
The Modify Pipe window is a dual purpose window which allows the user to define the
detail and/or connect the branch head and tail or modify an existing branch refer to Modify
Branch.
The window also allows the user to create, define and connect any number of branches
under the pipe element, from the Connectivity pane of the Modify Pipe window, click New
Branch.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
By default the specification selected in the Default Pipe Specification will be used, but the
user can select an alternative Spec for the pipe or branch element. From the Modify Pipe
window, in the Pipe: pane click Change Detail.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
The Modify Pipe specification window is displayed, the window has the same functionality
as the Default Specification window, for more details, refer to Default Pipe Specification.
To set another Pipe element as CE, click Set Pipe. For more details refer to Modify
Pipework.
To define head and tails of a branch, from the Head Detail or Tail Detail pane of the Modify
Pipe window, click Change. For more details, refer to Define Head and Tail Details.
To connect to other branches or elements, from the Head Connection pane of the Modify
Pipe window, click Change. For more information refer to Define Head and Tail
Connections.
5.1
Define Head and Tail Details
The Head Detail and Tail Detail panes on the Modify Pipe window, are used to define the
position of the head explicitly.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
For example: to define the head of the branch, make sure the correct branch is highlighted
in the design database and the correct branch name in shown at the top of the Modify Pipe
window.
From the Head Detail part of the window, click Change.
The Modify Pipe window is now displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
Use the Modify Branch Head: part of the Modify Pipe window to define basic branch head
details:
In the Bore drop-down list, select the nominal bore of the pipe from the list of available sizes
in the catalogue.
In the Connection drop-down list, select the type of head connection from the list of
available connections in the catalogue.
The Direction specifies which direction the flow will take from the Branch Head. (The Head
direction is the direction of flow and the Tail direction is the opposite direction of the flow).
Use the Position wrt World: part of the Modify Pipe window to position the branch head
explicitly right click over Format to select a different type of format view.
Click
to display the Offset By fields which allows the user to enter offset values for the
branch head.
Click
again to return to the explicit position text fields.
Click Pick Position to find a position on the 3D graphical view. If required, select the
checkbox to lock the position.
Click Apply, the Head Detail: part of the Modify Pipe window is now populated, and the
head is now positioned but not connected as shown in the Connectivity part of the Modify
Pipe window, refer to Define Head and Tail Connections.
Click Copy To Head, to copy the head of the pipe.
Click Back to discard the changes and return to the Modify Pipe window prior to any
changes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
5.2
Define Head and Tail Connections
The Head Connection and Tail Connection panes on the Modify Pipe window, is used to
connect the head or tail of the branch to an appropriate component (tee), an equipment
nozzle or another branch. The user can select the component or branch by picking it in the
3D graphical view, or selection from the List of available connections.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
From the Head Connection: part of the Modify Pipe window, click Change to display the
Modify Pipe window.
To return to the Modify Pipe window populated with the head and tail details and
connections or to select another pipe as the CE, click Set Pipe. By default the specification
selected in Default Pipe Specification will be used but the user can select an alternative
specification, select Change Detail.
Using Pick, the user can select the appropriate component or branch in the 3D graphical
view.
If the user selects a component or branch that cannot be connected to, the user will receive
an error message summarising the problem, for example in the following window an error
explains the element is already connected, only elements which are unconnected can be
selected.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
The user must select Pick again, the Modify Pipe window is displayed with a list of
available connections:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
The user must now select the connections displayed in the List of connections, the
Connect functionality is only available for selection when the connection from the List of
connections pane of the Modify Pipe window is Unset, when activated click Connect.
The Modify Pipe window is now populated with basic details of the selected component or
branch and the connection is shown in the 3D graphical view.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
Once the user has defined or selected the branch head and tail, the branch now consists of
a single piece of pipe running between the branch head and tail shown as a red dotted line,
which means the branch route is geometrically incorrect.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
5.3
New Branch Creation
To create a new branch under the Pipe element identified as the CE, from the Modify Pipe
window, click New Branch.
A new branch is created and displayed in the Design Explorer and in the Connectivity pane
of the Modify Pipe window. The user can then populate the Modify Pipe window with
details and connections as required. For more details, refer to Define Head and Tail Details
and Define Head and Tail Connections.
5.4
Position and Orientation
The user can orientate and position elements in the Pipework design model in more
complex ways through the use of the main menu bar, basic position options are available
from the Position toolbar.
5.4.1
Move Branch
Click Position > Branch > Move, the Move Branch window will be displayed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
The Move Branch window is very similar to the Move Window. Except in the Move Branch
window under Parameters pane, the Origin option allows the Head or Tail of a selected
branch to be moved. For a detailed explanation of the Move window, refer to Design
Common Functionality User Guide.
5.4.2
Drag Move Branch
Click Position > Branch > Drag, the Drag Move Branch window will be displayed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
The Drag Move Branch window is very similar to the Drag Window. Except in the Drag
Move Branch window under Parameters pane, the Origin option allows the Head or Tail of
a selected branch to be moved. For a detailed explanation of the Drag window, refer to
Design Common Functionality User Guide.
5.5
Non-standard Branch Connections
The Non-standard connections functionality allows the user to model non-standard
connections in the Pipework application. A non-standard connection is essentially a branch
connection at any point on the surface of the main branch. Normally these are tube
connections which are inserted by drilling a hole at some point and welding the new branch
into place.
With Non-standard branch connections the user can create and connect new branches or
connect existing branches to components such as valves, reducers and elbows. The branch
connects to a cartesian point (PIPCA) owned by the component or an element called a Pipe
Tapping (PTAP) for tube to tube connections.
Unlike other TEE or OLET type connections a special branch connection does not require
additional components in the piping specification but it does require the AVEVA specification
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
/General-Tappings which is contained in the DB MASTER/PIPECATA in the AVEVA MAS
project.
The user must create a connection point and then if required position and orientate it:
5.5.1
•
Connect Existing Branch
•
Create New Branch.
Connect Existing Branch
To connect existing branches, click Create non-standard branch connections from the
Pipework toolbar to display the Non-standard Branch Connections window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
From the Main Branch pane, click Select, the user is prompted to Identify Main Branch.
Once the selection has been made, the selected branch name, bore and wall thickness are
displayed in the Non-standard Branch Connections window and the Connect Existing
Branch check box is automatically selected.
From the Select Branch pane, click Select, the user is prompted to Identify Stub in
Branch. Once the selection has been made, the branch connects to a cartesian point
(PIPCA) owned by the component. The selected branch name and bore are displayed in the
Non-standard Branch Connections window. As the branch is not yet connected the
Current connection details part of the Non-standard Branch Connections window head
and tail are not connected.
From the Connection Details part of the Non-standard Connections window, the user
can set the connection and tapping type, bore size and insert depth.
The actual connection can be edited by changing its type, or adding a connection
component such as a half coupling.
The Branch Type can be selected from the drop-down list:
Insert Connection
The branch tube is inserted into the main branch and welded.
Surface Connection
The branch tube is placed on the main branch and welded.
Saddle Connection
The branch tube is shaped to fit on the main branch and
welded.
Extruded Connection
The main branch tube is shaped by machine to form a tube to
tube connection.
Boss Connection
a fitting is selected from the spec and it is welded to form the
branch connection.
Note: Boss type elements must be in the branch specification, have a gtype of COUP and
COMPTYPE eq 'TAPP' to be recognised by this application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
In the Note field the user can add a fabrication note which will appear on the piping
isometrics
The Insert Depth value varies according to the Branch Type selected and is calculated
using a set of standard calculations for branches on centreline. In some cases the
calculation may need to be adjusted by eye to provide a more accurate material length. To
do this enter a value into the Insert Depth field. The value shown in this field can be one of
three types:
Insert Depth (Default)
the standard calculation for this type of branch.
Insert Depth (Actual)
the actual insert depth on the current connection.
Insert Depth (User)
the current value entered by the user but not yet fixed by
clicking Apply. The button to the right of the insert depth will
swap the insert values between actual and default. For
example if the default is 4.75mm and the actual is 14.57mm
clicking Default will change the insert depth to 4.75 and the
button will have a display of Actual. Clicking it again will return
the insert depth value to 14.57.
Click Apply to create the connection or click Dismiss to discard any inputs and close the
Non-standard Connections window.
5.5.2
Create New Branch
To connect a new branch, click Create Non-standard Branch Connections from the
Pipework toolbar to display the Non-standard Branch Connections window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
From the Main Branch pane, click Select, the user is prompted to Identify Main Branch.
Once the selection has been made, the selected branch name, bore and wall thickness are
displayed in the Non-standard Branch Connections window. Select the Connect New
Branch check box.
The Create New Branch pane is automatically displayed with a name for the new branch.
Click Pick connection Point, the user is prompted to Pick a surface Position to locate
initial branch position:
The new branch is initially positioned at the new connection point in the 3D graphical view,
to adjust the position of the connection point, click Adjust position. The Locate Branch
window is displayed and a positioning aid (plane) is displayed in the 3D graphical view.
The Locate Branch window is populated with the direction of the plane and branch also
with the angle at which the new connection point is initially positioned.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
If required the user can position the new connection, use the Nudge and Rotation parts of
the Locate Branch window.
Click OK to position the connection at the new location or click Dismiss to discard any
inputs and close the Locate Branch window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
From the Connection Details pane, the user can set the connection and tapping type, bore
size and insert depth.
Click Apply to create the connection or click Dismiss to discard any inputs and close the
Non-standard Connections window.
5.5.3
Isometric Drawing
If required, the user can produce the branches (new or existing) and the connection
information in ISODRAFT. Refer to ISODRAFT User Guide for further information.
When generating an isometric drawing containing non-standard branch connections (which
use the PIPCA element), a detailed plot-file for each non-standard-branch-connection
(PIPCA) is generated and stored in the project iso directory. For example, SAMPLE project
files are stored in the SAMISO directory.
The user must have write access to a draft database to generate plotfile(s). When a drawing
is generated as a plotfile, a session of DRAFT is automatically opened and closed. If the
user does not have write access to a draft database, a warning message displays.
The database ADMIN/PADD (plant, SAMPLE project) must be in the current MDB as the
drawing templates and drawing representation rules are contained in these.
It is recommended that the user does not have a session of DRAFT open when generating
isometric drawings containing non-standard branch connections
In order for detailed plot files to appear on the isometric drawing, the Display Plots option
and associated positioning parameters must be set in the ISODRAFT Detail Plots window.
Refer to the ISODRAFT User Guide for further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Branch Element
The detailed plot file displays in the designated area and is identified by a DETAIL tag on the
main isometric drawing:
The drawings (DRWG) generated in DRAFT are saved in the department (DEPT) /
NSBC_DRAWINGS/DEPT, under the registry (REGI) /NSBC_DRAWINGS/REGI with
naming convention PIPE1_DETAIL.S1 where PIPE1 is the name of the pipe and S1
increases with each PIPCA found under that pipe (PIPE1_DETAIL.S2 for the second
PIPCA)
The plotfiles are saved with the naming convention PIPE1_DETAIL.S1.plt where PIPE1 is
the name of the pipe and S1 increases with each PIPCA found under that pipe.
If a user wishes to modify the detailed plot, the generated drawing can be modified in
DRAFT. The plotfile must be saved in the project ISO directory (alongside the automatically
generated plotfile(s)), with '_MOD' added to the file name after '_DETAIL' (for example,
PIPE1_DETAIL _MOD.S1.plt). When the isometric drawing is generated, the plotfile with the
modified name (_MOD) is used instead of the automatically generated one.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
5:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
6
Pipework Components
Pipework Components are single pieces of pipe used together to create a Pipework design.
It is usual for the user to build up the pipework design by adding components sequentially,
starting at the branch head and positioning and orientating each component as they
proceed until the branch tail is reached. The user can insert a component into existing
sequence by navigating to the component immediately before the required location and then
creating the new component.
There are many different combinations of the Pipework that can be created, because of this
the Pipework application uses a common layout for windows that are presented to the user.
For the same reason this document only includes a detailed description of how to create
one specific type of Pipework component. The information can be applied to the same
processes that are used to create all other types of Pipework components.
6.1
Component Creation
Referring to the Pipework Hierarchy, a pipework component must reside below an existing
Pipe Branch element. For a more detailed explanation of creating an Pipework Branch, refer
to Branch Element.
If the user is not at the Branch level in the database hierarchy the user will receive an error
message summarising the problem, for example in the following window an error explains
that the element the user is attempting to create must reside below a branch or component
element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
Click Show pipe component creation form from the Pipework toolbar to display the
Component Creation window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
The Component Creation window displays all the components available from the
catalogue under the current piping specification set at the Pipe and Branch level.
Although a specification was selected earlier the user can select a different specification for
the component. The default specification will initially be selected but the user can select an
alternative specification.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
Click Select. Select a specification from the list of Alternative Specifications.
Select an insulation specification from the insulation list. If no insulation is required, select
None. (If a new specification is required, refer to your system administrator).
Select a tracing from the Tracing list. If no tracing is required, select None. (If a new
specification is required, refer to your system administrator).
Click Done to commit the change, the user will be returned to the Component Creation
window.
The user is required to select an component from the Component Types: list. The
Component Creation window will be displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
If the user wishes to return to the previous window, click Choose.
In the Create Component: part of the Component Creation window, the user must select
the required flange displayed by sub-type.
The Filter By drop-down list sorts the components by sub-type.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
Using the Creation from part of the Create Component window, the user must choose the
direction of flow, the software automatically creates the component in the Head to Tail (With
Flow) direction. The user can change the direction to Tail and Head (Against Flow).
If the Auto. Create Adjacent checkbox is selected, the software automatically determines if
there is a requirement for an associated component (on a valve, the associated component
would be a flange and gasket) and if so, what is the appropriate.
If the Skip Connected Comps. checkbox is selected, the pipework application
automatically determines which components are connected, then positions the creation
point approximately.
After selecting the components details, the user must connect or place the component.
Click Connect - connects the component to the previous one or branch head/tail. If the
component has been connected in the wrong orientation, click Flip Components to connect
the component in the right orientation
The Connect option is only available if the component is connected in the wrong orientation
and is not applicable to elbows and bends.
Click Place - positions the component at the point selected in the 3D graphical view.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
6.2
Routing Pipe Components
To continue routing pipework, the user must select the component from the chose
specification, then position and set orientation using the Model Editor, (refer to Graphical
Model Manipulation Guide) or from the Piping toolbar, select Align selection/component
or Direct selection/component.
The tube is not created explicitly: it is created automatically and implied between adjacent
components, the tube is displayed in the design explorer as TUBI.
and as implied tubing in the 3D graphical view:
6.2.1
Connect Branch
The way that the head/tail of a branch of the current branch can be connected to the head/
tail of another branch, equipment nozzle or multiway component can be selected. The
required branch must be the currently selected element in the database hierarchy.
To connect branch, from the main menu, select Connect > Branch, the Connect Branch
window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
The name of the currently selected element is displayed in the Connect Branch window.
To connect the head or tail of the current branch to another branch or component, select
Head or Tail from the drop-down menu.
In the To drop-down list, the user must choose from a list of available components or head/
tail of another branch to which the head/tail of the current branch is to be connected. The
user is required to specify how to identify the point of existing piping component or branch to
which the head/tail is to be connected.
Nozzle
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify NOZZ, for
more information, refer to Equipment User Guide.
Tee
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify TEE.
Olet
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify OLET.
Elbow
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify ELBO.
Reducer
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify REDU.
Flange
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify FLAN.
Multiway
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify design
ppoint.
Branch Head
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify BRAN.
Branch Tail
The user is prompted in the 3D graphical view to Identify BRAN.
First Member
Automatically specifies the Branch Head, the first element in the
existing branch.
Last Member
Automatically specifies the Branch tail, the last element in the
existing branch.
Name
The Name window is displayed, input the name in the Name field,
click OK to identify the element and close the Name window, click
Cancel to close the Name window.
Click Apply, to connect the current branch, Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss to
close the Connect Branch window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
Click CE to select another branch.
6.2.2
Connect Component
A piping component can be connected in such a way, so that it is orientated and positioned
so that the p-arrive is directed towards and aligned with the p-leave of the previous piping
component.
Note: The option checks that the components being connected have compatible
connection types, unless Force connect is selected, for more information, refer to
Auto Force Connect.
To connect a component so that the p-arrive is directed towards and aligned with the pleave of the previous piping component, from the main menu, select Connect >
Component to display the Connect Component window:
The name of the currently selected element is displayed in the Connect Component
window.
The way that a piping component connects to the next or previous piping component can be
modified by using the first drop-down list.
Connect to Previous
Connects the piping component to Previous piping
component
Connect to Next
Connects the piping component to Next piping component
Depending on the piping component to be connected, the user will be presented with
differing options. If the component does not have a change in direction, the default
orientation (Only) cannot be changed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
If the component has a change in direction, the user will be required to select from the
choice of options available in the second drop-down list and input the required flow direction
in the is field.
Click Apply to connect the component, Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss to close
the Connect Component window.
Click CE to choose another piping component.
6.3
Pipe Assemblies
A pipe assembly is a series of components and branches which are replica copies (in all
aspects) of original components and branches. Or an assembly definition may be created to
access existing macros or forms. Pipe assemblies are also used in Pipe Splitting, for more
information, refer to Pipe Splitting.
6.3.1
Assembly Hierarchy
To create pipe assemblies, a separate hierarchy must be created in the design explorer to
provide a storage area for elements which are not part of the design model, called the
Application Data World Hierarchy.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
6.3.2
Create Pipe Assemblies
All the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with creating or modifying pipe
assemblies are initiated from the Pipe Assembly Manager window. The window acts as a
task hub, select Utilities > Pipe Assemblies to display the Pipe Assembly Manager
window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
6.3.3
Application Dataworld Hierarchy
As with the Design Hierarchy, new or existing assemblies are stored in a hierarchy the
elements must be stored within a world element, followed by an assembly area and
assembly elements. Once the assembly element is created an element called a Design
Data Set is created below it, this stores the rules associated with the assembly and its
individual components.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
Create Assembly World Element
The user must now create an Assembly World element, from the Pipe Assembly Manager
window, click Create World.
The Create Assembly World window is displayed:
The user must input the attributes for the assembly world element.
Create Assembly Area Element
The user must now create a assembly area element, from the Pipe Assembly Manager
window, click Create Area.
The Create Assembly Area window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
The user must now input the attributes for the assembly area element.
Create Assembly Element
The user must now create a assembly element, from the Pipe Assembly Manager window,
click Create Assembly.
The Create Assembly window is displayed:
The user must now input the attributes for the assembly element.
The basic hierarchy has now been created and is displayed in the design explorer and the
Pipe Assembly Manager window which can now be populated with assemblies. The
easiest way to create an assembly is to copy an existing assembly already created in the
design, click Copy Design. The assembly is displayed in the design explorer and the Pipe
Assembly Manager window.
Additional rules can now be added to the assembly and individual components within that
assembly.
Non-Graphical Assemblies
To enable an assembly to perform a function or display a window, the function or form rule
needs to be created for the assembly.
Display a form
From the Assembly Rules pane on the Pipe Assembly Manager window, select Form in
the Rule column, and then click New, the Pipe Assembly Rules window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
In the Form Name field, enter the name of the form to be displayed when the assembly is
used, the form name must not contain !! or ().
Click OK, the Form Name is added to the Assembly Rules and stored in the Assembly
Design Data Set so that it can be run each time the assembly is used.
Click Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window.
Perform a Function
From the Assembly Rules part of the Pipe Assembly Manager window, select Function,
click New, the Pipe Assembly Rules window is displayed:
In the Function Name field, enter the name of the function to be performed when the
assembly is used, the function must not contain !! or ().
Click OK, the Function Name is added to the Assembly Rules and stored in the Assembly
Design Data Set so that it can be run each time the assembly is used.
Click Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window.
Primary and Secondary Origins
When an assembly is inserted into the design, the arrive point of the first component is used
to position the assembly unless a primary origin is defined.
Note: Secondary origins are used in pipe splitting to derive correct spool lengths, refer to
Pipe Spooling.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
To set a primary origin, from the Assembly Rules part of the Pipe Assembly Manager
window, select Primary Origin, click New, the Pipe Assembly Rules window is displayed:
The primary origin can set by selecting the point in the 3D graphical view or the element
name or reference number and the required PPOINT can be input.
To edit or delete any form, function or primary and secondary origin, from the Assembly
Rules part of the Pipe Assembly Manager window, click Edit or Delete.
Assembly Component Rules
Component rules are necessary to add greater flexibility to assemblies in general use. The
concept of copying an assembly instance has limitations where specifications have different
STYPEs, because the selection will fail. For example the STYPE for a gasket in one
specification is RF where in another it is G. To solve this problem, two assemblies could be
created to cater for both cases by having rules in the assembly rules.
Assembly rules multiple STYPEs, Positions, Orientation and restricting the STYPE to a
particular SPEC/STYPE combination.
Each component in the assembly may have instances of all rule types associated with it.
When the component is copied into the design, the rules are evaluated in place of the
default actions. If no rules are present than a new item is created using the same relative
position and relative and orientation as that of the original. The distinct actions for each
component are:
•
Selection (STYPE) - SEL WITH STYP RF
•
Position - DIST 200 FROM PREV
•
Orientation - ORI IS N WRT PREV
•
Bore Selection - Use PL of PREV ELBO.
The addition of rules enables the default actions to be supplemented or overridden, for more
information, refer to Component Rules.
6.3.4
Component Rules
To create or edit Component Rules, from the Assembly Rules part of the Pipe Assembly
Manager window, select the component in the DESIGN hierarchy. The Component Rules
are now displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
Stype
The Stype rule replaces the default Stype.
To create or edit a Stype rule, select Stype in the Component Rules part of the Pipe
Assembly Manager window to display the Pipe Assembly Rules window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
The name of the Design Data Set is named, in the Alternative STYPE part of the Pipe
Assembly Rules window. Input or amend the Specification and Stype.
Click to select Apply to Similar Items checkbox to apply all similar items in the assembly.
Click to select Force this SPEC/STYPE checkbox forces the assembly to use a particular
specification and stype regardless of the pipe specification where the assembly is being
built.
Click OK to create or edit the Stype rule and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window or
Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window.
Position
The position rule replace the default position of the component and may be through
command such as THRO PT or Dist 1000. These lines will be executed as complete
positioning commands in place of the default position derived from the relative position in
the assembly.
To create or edit a Position rule, select Position in the Component Rules part of the Pipe
Assembly Manager window to display the Pipe Assembly Rules window:
The name of the Design Data Set is named, in the Positioning Command part of the Pipe
Assembly Rules window. Input the Positioning Command.
Click OK to create or edit the Position rule and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window or
Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window.
Orientation
Orientation rules can be in two forms, first as a single command in place of the default
orientation, or as a trigger to prompt the user for orientation. For example ORI and P3 is D
for a tee in a drain to always force it to point down. Or the command could be PROMPT, to
ask for the orientation when the assembly is being built.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
The name of the Design Data Set is named, in the Orientation Command part of the Pipe
Assembly Rules window. Input the Orientation Command.
Click OK to create or edit the Orientation rule and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window
or Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window.
Bore Selection
The components which make up an assembly can often be of differing bore sizes, to reduce
the amount of selection, bore selection rules can be put in place to use other components as
a reference rather than prompting the user to select a bore size.
To create or edit a Bore Selection rule, select Bore Selection in the Component Rules
part of the Pipe Assembly Manager window to display the Pipe Assembly Rules window:
The name of the Design Data Set is named, in the Bore Size part of the Pipe Assembly
Rules window. From the Bore Type drop-down list, select the bore type to act as a
reference.
In the Copy From field, to identify the location of the existing assembly.
Select PICK, to select the component to act as an reference.
Click OK to create or edit the Bore Size rule and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window
or Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Pipe Assembly Rules window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Components
Key Elements
A Key Element (of which there can be only one) is provided to allow an existing element in
the design to directly replace an assembly such that the assembly is built around an existing
design element as if it was part of the assembly. In effect a design component is used as a
poisoning and orientation component for the rest of the assembly.
Set a Key Element
To set a Key Element, right click the component in the design hierarchy of the Pipe
Assembly Manager window. The Key Element drop-down menu is displayed:
Select Set Key Element from the drop-down list, the key element is displayed in the
database hierarchy.
Remove Key Element
To remove a Key Element, right click the component in the design hierarchy of the Pipe
Assembly Manager window. The Key Element drop-down menu is displayed:
Select Remove Key Element from the drop-down list, the key element is removed from the
database hierarchy.
6.4
Standard Model Library Manager
The Standard Model Library Manager window, acts as a task hub to create the hierarchy
required for the creation of standard model library items. The process is virtually identical to
the creation of the hierarchy required in all applications. For more information, refer to
Design Common Functionality User Guide.
6.5
Import Pipe Data
The Import Pipe Data function imports tags, descriptions and other attributes from a CSV or
XLS format file. Select Utilities > Import Pipe Data to display the Pipework Data Import
window.
Refer to Import Data in the Design Common Functionality User Guide for further
information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
6:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Quick Pipe Routing
7
Quick Pipe Routing
Quick Pipe Routing is used when the head and tail of the branch has been defined but the
route between the two has not, implied pipe is not shown. (ill defined route = dotted line).
The mouse is used to define the direction of the pipe route, elbows or bends are
automatically inserted when the route changes direction.
Bad alignment between two components, where the leave direction and arrive direction of
adjacent elements do not match, (this could be due to the current design tolerance settings,
for example: offset, angle and ratio).
Arrive or Leave where Head or Tail is undefined, where the end directly adjacent to a
component is unset or ill-defined. An unset end is where the Head or Tail has its attributes
left in the default state, whereas an ill-defined end is where, when the reference is set, the
position is not with the reference item or when the end reference is not set, hence the end
connection is unset.
Click on the dotted line (ill-defined route), which then turns green, from the main menu bar,
select Model Editor. For more information on the Model Editor, refer to Graphical Model
Manipulation Guide.
The Quick Routing Handle are displayed at the head and tail of the ill-defined route. Illdefined routes are where the Head or Tail of a Branch have defined but the route between
has not.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Quick Pipe Routing
The user can now create a pipe run between the head and tail of the branch, using the
mouse, the quick routing handles and the options available from the Model Editor. For more
information on these options, refer to Graphical Model Manipulation Guide. With the
exception of slope functionality which is only available in the piping application. Refer to
Slope for further information.
A change of direction is displayed in the 3D graphical view and the design explorer as a
elbow or bend (dependent upon the specification). To make the choice of elbows or bends,
right click on the cardinal direction handles, the Model Editor menu is displayed:
Select Component Choice > Use Elbows.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Quick Pipe Routing
7.1
Slope
The user can set the slope of a component’s leave tube whilst using quick pipe router by
specifying the required rate of fall or slope angle. Applies only to a component which
involves a change of direction (such as an elbow).
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Quick Pipe Routing
By default, No Slope is selected (no slope will be applied to the pipe leg). To set the sloping
angle, select Slope Angle, the Set Slope Angle window is displayed.
Enter the sloping angle, click OK to apply the sloping angle, quick pipe router will route the
pipe with the sloping angle or click Cancel to discard any inputs and close the window.
Note: If the default slope is set on a pipe or branch then extra functionality is available for
selection, Default Slope Up and Default Slope Down. When selected, quick pipe
router would route the pipe in accordance with the selected default slope.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
7:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
8
Pipe Router
The Pipe Router utility is a rule-based tool which allows the user to automatically route
multiple or single pipes. If non-orthogonal pipes are required, the user can create these
manually, for more information, refer to Quick Pipe Routing.
The pipe(s) are routed, from the branch’s head and ends at the branch’s tail, positioning and
orientating piping components (reducers and welds), and where appropriate adding
connection components such as flanges and gaskets. The flow direction is always forwards
(from head to tail). The pipes will be created orthogonally and with the minimum number of
bends or elbows and where possible clash-free.
The user can constrain the route taken by the pipe(s) with the use of routing points, planes,
rules and pipe racks and if required, modify the route once it has been created. For more
information on these, refer to Automatic Pipe Routing Administration.
All the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with the Pipe Router utility are
initiated from a central Pipe Router window which acts as a task hub.
To open the Pipe Router window, select Utilities > Pipe Router from the main menu bar to
display the Pipe Router window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
8.1
Defaults
The pipe router is supplied with defaults which the user can change if required. From the
Pipe Router window, select Setting > Defaults to display the Pipe Router Defaults
window:
The user can use the File menu from the Pipe Router Defaults window, to save settings or
load from settings from elsewhere, see System Administrator if new settings are required:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The Pipe Router Defaults window, contains all the tools to determine the defaults for the
pipe router.
The Output messages to file fields, Directory and Filename allows the user to specify
where to save and what to name the error messages file. The user also has the option to
overwrite or add to the end of existing error file by selecting an option from the drop-down
list.
To remove the output message when the user has finished a session check the Remove
Message file at the end of session box.
To specify what the Pipe Router does in the event of an error, from the Action on error
drop-down list: select one of the available options.
Stop
Stops all further routing
Continue
Continues the routing even if an error occurs
Pause
An alert window is displayed, which the user must acknowledge
before the routing continues
To specify which component is used when the routing changes direction, from the Change
direction using drop-down list select one of the available option.
Bend
When a change of direction occurs, a bend will be included in the
routing and displayed in the design database and 3D graphical
view
Elbow
When a change of direction occurs, an elbow will be included in
the routing and displayed in the design database and 3D graphical
view
Rule
Pipe Router will search for a rule which defines the type of
component to use. To create this type of rule, refer to Routing
Rules.
The user can also specify a default rule set from the Default rule set world drop-down list
for all the branches created by Pipe Router which will be automatically assigned as a low
priority rule set. Here the user or system administrator can create company and/or project
specific rule sets. For more information, refer to Routing Rules.
Once the rule set has been specified the user can define to what the rule set will be applied,
from the Applied to all drop-down list, select the required design hierarchy element.
Pipe Router automatically searches for and make use of any routing planes and pipe racks
with a branch to route the pipe on. The pipe racks exist within the search volume of a branch
or branches, the default search volume is the volume between the head and tail of a pipe.
The user can extend the search outside this volume by entering the distances in the In Z
Direction (vertical) and In X/Y Directions (horizontal) fields.
Pipe Router will only automatically use a routing plane or pipe rack to route a pipe if the
distance that it will travel along the plane or rack is greater than a minimum travel distance.
Enter the minimum distance, in the Minimum Travel Distance field.
The user can specify the minimum Pipe gap between pipes on racks (and other planes),
and also specify in the Pipe gap rounding field the extent to which the gap size will be
rounded, which can help minimise construction errors.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
8.2
Define a Route
The user must first create the pipe and branch elements in the design hierarchy and
connect or position their heads and tails and define bore. If the branch contains piping
components, these must be selected.
8.2.1
Define Head and Tail
From the Pipework main menu bar, select Create > Pipe to display the Create Pipe
window:
In the Name box, input the name of the new Pipe.
By default the Primary System is No System, to change the type of primary system select
a system from the Primary System drop-down list.
The Slope Ref specifies the slope reference attribute (the default is none). To change the
slope reference attribute, select a slope reference from the Slope Ref: drop-down list.
By default the specification selected in Default Pipe Specification will be used but the user
can select an alternative specification, click Specifications. The user can now change the
Default Specifications, for more information, refer to Default Pipe Specification.
Click Attributes, the Pipe Attributes window is displayed, the user can to view or modify
the attributes of the Pipe element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Click OK to save any changes and close the Pipe Attributes window, the user is returned to
the Create Pipe window.
Click Cancel on the Create Pipe window to discard changes and close the Create Pipe
window, or OK to create a new pipe element in the Design database and close the window.
The Create Branch window is displayed.
8.2.2
Create Branch
The Create Branch window allows the user to create a branch element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
In the Name box, input the name of the new Branch.
The Slope Ref specifies the slope reference attribute (the default is none). To change the
slope reference attribute, select a slope reference from the Slope Ref: drop-down list.
By default the specification selected in Default Pipe Specification will be used but the user
can select an alternative specification, click Specifications. The user can now change the
Default Specifications, for more information, refer to Default Pipe Specification.
Click Attributes, the Branch Attributes window is displayed, the user can view or modify
the attributes of the Branch element
The way in what the head or tail is connected or positioned can be changed by selecting
from a choice of options in the Head/Tail Setting drop-down list:
•
Connect - Select Connect and click OK, the Connect Branch window is displayed:
The user is required to specify if it is the Head or Tail of the branch which is to be connected,
and then to what component the head or tail is to connect to from the choice of options in
the To drop-down list. or click CE.
Click Apply to save the changes and close the Connect Branch window, the user is
prompted to select the head and then the tail of the branch in the 3D graphical view.
Click Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss to discard the changes and close the
Connect Branch window.
•
Explicit - Select Explicit and click OK, the Branch at Explicit Position window is
displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The user is required to specify the position and orientation for the head and tail in the
Position: part of the Branch at Explicit Position window using the generic positioning
options.
To change the bore size of the head or tail, select a bore size from the Bore drop-down list.
In Direction enter the leave direction of the head or tail.
The type of connection to be made at the head or tail (for example: flange, gasket) can be
changed by selecting from a choice of options in the Connection drop-down list.
The Slope Ref specifies the slope reference attribute (the default is none). To change the
slope reference attribute, select a slope reference from the Slope Ref: drop-down list.
Click Apply to save the changes and close the Branch at Explicit Position window, the
user is prompted to select the head and then the tail of the branch in the 3D graphical view.
Click Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss to discard the changes and close the
Branch at Explicit Position window.
•
None - Select None - the head and tail are unset (not connected or positioned).
Routing Pipes
The user must now add the pipes to the Pipe Router window, and then route the pipes,
Pipes can be added individually or in groups.
By default, the Pipe Router routes pipes in the order in which they are added to the Pipe
Router window. The routing order can have an effect on the route taken by pipes. Refer to
Changing the Order in which Pipes are Routed for further information. Pipe Router routes
the selected pipes, adding elbows, gaskets and flanges, as required.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
When a pipe is added to Pipe Router, it is given a head and tail work-point. These are the
points where a route begins and ends. Pipe Router positions work-points at a distance from
the branch head or tail which allows for any connection components that are required.
For example, if the head of a branch is a flanged nozzle, then Pipe Router will automatically
add a gasket and a flange. Pipe Router will then begin routing the pipe from the end of the
flange.
How Pipe Router Finds a Route
The Pipe Router creates a route using an algorithm which minimises material cost while
avoiding clashes with other objects. The algorithm has three modes of operation, described
as Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3 modes. Pipe Router first searches for a route using Level 1
mode. If no clash-free Level 1 route is found, a search is made using Level 2 mode, and if
no Level 2 route is found Level 3 mode is used.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Level One Mode
In level one mode, Pipe Router searches for an orthogonal route between the head and tail
work-points of a pipe, using the minimum number of bends or elbows. Lever One routes
(Box 3) shows examples of the routes available in level one mode.
Box 1
The default route is ABC, as this requires only two
bends. If this route is blocked, Pipe Router will try
route ADE which uses three bends.
Box 2
If Pipe Router cannot find a route using the routes
shown on box one, it will attempt the routes shown
on box two, where route ABC uses three bends,
and ADE uses four bends.
Box 3
Finally, if it is still unsuccessful in finding a route,
Pipe Router will attempt the routes shown on box
three, where both routes use four bends.
An example of a Level One route displays a level one route in which the head work-point is
facing up.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Level Two Mode
If all first level routes are blocked, Pipe Router will attempt to find second level routes. In
second level mode, Pipe Router will withdraw the route into the box by a distance which
enables the pipe to bypass the obstruction. Pipe Router then attempts the same routing
patterns as those used in level one mode. An example of a level two route is shown below.
Level Three Mode
If Pipe Router cannot find a clash-free route using first and second level routes, it will
attempt to find a third level route. In third level mode, Pipe Router extends the box outwards
until it bypasses the obstruction and then attempts to route the pipe using level one routing
principles. An example of a level three route is shown below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Adding Components to a Route
Once Pipe Router has worked out a route, it constructs the Branch by adding whatever
Elbows (or Bends) are needed.
Note: To be efficient, Pipe Router imposes a low upper limit on the number of Elbows it will
add to a Branch: it does not attempt to be a maze solver.
The user can specify components in a Branch before routing, for example by importing a
P&ID file as described in Import a P&ID File. The user can also modify a routed Branch by
adding other components, for example, Valves or Instruments, by selecting Modify >
Branch from the main menu and creating the components in the normal way.
Only the principal piping components need to be added. Pipe Router will add Flanges,
Gaskets, lap joint stub ends and Welds as necessary, using the COCO (Connection
Compatibility) tables to create the correct types.
Components can be locked into a given position, in which case they will not be moved,
even if the Branch is re-routed. Refer to Locked Components for more information about
using locked components.
If there are particular constraints that must be placed on a Branch, for example, passing
through a given point or plane, then you must use one of the techniques described in
Constraining a Route.
Insertion of Reducers at Bore Changes
Before Pipe Router positions any components on a Branch, it checks the Branch to see if it
contains any components whose bore is different from the preceding component. If one is
found, then by default the Pipe Router will select the first suitable Reducer that it finds in the
catalogue, regardless of whether it is concentric or eccentric.
The user can set rules to specify whether concentric or eccentric Reducers are used. For
information about routing rules, refer to Routing Rules.
Note: Pipe Router treats bores being equal if they are the same within 5mm.
How Pipe Router Routes to Free Tails
If a Branch has a free Tail, that is, if the Tail is not connected to another Branch or you have
not specifically defined the Tail position, Pipe Router will automatically position the Tail once
it has positioned all of the components in the Branch and applied all constraints.
If this fails, for example, because there is a clash or a component positioning rule cannot be
satisfied, then it will introduce an Elbow after the constraint, before the first component. Pipe
Router will then position the elbow in a direction that results in a clash-free route, and which
satisfies component positioning and orientation rules.
If the Branch does not have any constraints, the position of the Tail depends on the position
and orientation of the Branch Head. Often, this may be a Tee. For more information, refer to
How the Pipe Router Positions Tees.
Tail direction: The TDIR attribute for a free tail is never set if the last constraint is a plane or
a rack. In all other cases, TDIR is taken from the direction of the last component.
How the Pipe Router Positions Tees
Pipe Router checks each Branch for connections to other Branches, that is it looks for Tees
or other components which have a CREF or CRFA attribute set.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
If the Branch which connects to the Tee has a free Tail, then the Tee is treated the same as
any other component.
In all other cases, the Tee will influence the route taken by the original Branch. In general,
Pipe Router will select the closest route to any constraints in the connecting Branch. If there
are none, then it will select the route closest to the other end of the connecting Branch.
Tees which can be balanced will then be positioned. Refer to Balanced Tees.
Where a Branch contains more than one Tee, the first Tee in the Branch will influence the
route taken. Pipe Router will position any subsequent Tees as close as possible to the next
constraint, or the other end of the connecting branch.
You can control the position of a Tee by locking it in position, or by constraining the route,
using a routing point. For more information on Routing points, refer to Create a Routing
Point.
Balanced Tees
Pipe Router will try to position a Tee to achieve balanced flow.
The Tee must be symmetric about a plane through P-arrive. The Pipe Router will change the
arrive p-point to achieve this if the bores on the p-points are equal. It will then check the
leave-bore and connect-bore. If the bores are equal then Pipe Router will assume that the
Tee is T-shaped.
The Tail directions of /B1 and /B2 must either be equal and not in the axial direction between
the Tail positions of the branches or opposite and in the axial direction between the Tail
positions of the branches:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
There must be no locked components on branch /B2, nor any after the Tee on branch /B1.
If there are multiway components in the Branches after the Tee, the Branches connected to
them:
•
Must have equivalent lists of component specifications,
•
Must be unconstrained
•
Must have free tails
The Tail positions of /B1 and /B2 must be equal in two of the three orthogonal co-ordinates:
The specifications of the positionable components after the Tee on /B1 must be the same as
the specifications of the components on branch /B2.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The Tee will be positioned so that:
•
The Tee is clash-free
•
There is enough room for all components between the Tee and the end of the Branch
•
The position does not result in a route to the Tee with an elbow close to the Tee.
If any of these conditions are not satisfied, Pipe Router will try moving the Tee back along
the arrive direction (or forward along the leave direction).
Covered Nozzles
When the Pipe Router is routing a Branch there may be several others waiting to be routed.
The best route for the current Branch may take the Pipe straight in front of other Nozzles,
which is most likely to happen when routing from a line of Vessels. It can be avoided by:
For more information on Changing the order for routing Pipes, refer to Changing the Order
in which Pipes are Routed.
Make sure the Nozzles or Equipment owning them have obstruction volumes extending
beyond their Nozzles which prevents other Pipes crossing in front of the Nozzle. The Branch
connected to the Nozzle will ignore this clash and successfully route onto the Nozzle.
Note: The obstruction volumes should be defined in the Catalogue: defining them in
DESIGN may result in less satisfactory routes.
Constraining a Route
Except in very simple cases, the user will need to give Pipe Router more information about
the route required to achieve a satisfactory route. The user can constrain a route using the
following:
•
Locked components
•
Routing Points
•
Routing Rules
•
Routing Planes
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
Pipe Racks
These constraints are described briefly in the following sections, and described in detail in
later sections.
Locked Components
A locked component is a component whose position has been fixed before routing takes
place. Pipe Router will route the Branch through the component. Locked components can
be used to manually modify the route taken.
In cluttered areas, Pipe Router may not be able to find a clash-free route, in which case it
will put in the simplest clashing route and inform you about the clash. You will then need to
modify the route to obtain a clash-free route, by moving components away from clashes,
locking them and re-routing. Both principal Piping components and router-created
components (for example, Elbows), can be moved and locked.
Routing Rules
One of the principal features of Pipe Router is its built-in rule engine. The user can use
routing rules to control the selection, position and orientation of piping components, and to
control how pipes use routing planes and pipe racks. For further information about using
Rules, see Routing Rules.
For information about creating the users own rules, refer to Automatic Pipe Routing
Administration.
Routing Points
Routing Points are points through which a pipe must pass. The user can specify the position
of a routing point, and the direction in which a pipe arrives at and leaves a routing point. For
further information, refer to Create and Use Routing Points.
Routing Planes
Routing planes are orthogonal planes which attract pipes to them and then guide the pipes
in the direction of the plane. Routing planes are useful, for example, where you want to
group pipes together, perhaps along a wall or ceiling. For further information, refer to Create
and Use Routing Planes.
Pipe Racks
In Pipe Router, a pipe rack is composed of a group of routing planes which enables the user
to model the route used on a physical pipe rack. There are two ways in which the user can
create a pipe rack. The user can create pipe racks on existing steelwork structures or model
them simply as a group of planes.
The user may find the second method useful when you are working on a conceptual design
and do not want to spend time creating steelwork structures. Once a pipe rack has been
created, the user can use routing rule to specify how different sorts of pipe run on the rack.
For further information, refer to Create and Use Pipe Racks.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Checking the Status of a Branch
Once the pipe(s) have been routed, the user can check the status of the branch, by
selecting Display > Status Summary from the Pipe Router window. The Status Summary
window is displayed, showing that two Branches have been routed successfully.
Note: Update and Dismiss at the bottom of the Pipe Router Status Summary window
can be used to update the report file or close the Pipe Router Status Summary
window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Changing the Order in which Pipes are Routed
Pipe Router routes pipes in the order in which they are added to the Pipe Router window.
However the user may need to change the routing order of particular pipes to ensure that
Pipe Router routes the most expensive pipes first. Or if the user is working with pipes that
are in close proximity to one another or where pipes cross paths.
The user can change the routing order, by selecting from a choice of options in the Modify >
Routing Order > from the Pipe Router window.
•
Auto - Automatically reorders branches according to routing dependencies, that is, if a
pipe is dependent on another pipe, then that pipe will be routed first. Select this option,
for example, after you reorder by bore.
Note: Option only affects piping networks: It will have no effect on unconnected Pipes.
•
Manual > Pipes - The user can manually specify the order in which the Pipe Router
routes each pipe, using the Pipe Router - Reorder Pipes window.
•
Manual > Branches - The user can manually specify the order in which the Pipe
Router routes each branch, using the Pipe Router - Reorder Branches window.
•
By Attribute - The user can reorder pipes according to particular attributes in
ascending or descending order, using the Reorder by Attribute window.
To reorder pipes according to their specification, select Group by specification check box,
which reorders the pipes so that they are displayed in alphabetical order of their
specification names, for example, all pipes which use the specification A150, followed by all
pipes which use the specification B150, and so on. The user can use this option in
conjunction with the attribute radio buttons.
For example, reorder pipes so that all Pipe Router displays all pipes which use the
specification A150 in descending order of their head bore, followed by all B150 specification
pipes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
8.2.3
Routing Messages
As Pipe Router routes a pipe, it examines each branch and generates a message about any
routing errors that it finds. These messages can help the user understand and correct
errors. It can view these messages both during and after pipe routing, providing the user
has set up a file in which to store the messages, as described previously.
To view routing messages, select Display > Routing Messages from the Pipe Router
window.
The Routing Messages window is displayed, the window will be empty if Pipe Router
routes all pipes without any errors.
Select Control > Close to close the Routing Messages window.
Branch Detail Window
Pipe Router enables the user to view details of the components and constraints in a branch
using the Branch Detail window. The user can select options to constrain the route taken by
a branch.
For example, the user can lock components in position, create routing points and add
routing planes and pipe racks to the constraint list. All of these facilities are explained in later
sections.
To display the Branch Detail window, select one of the routed Branches from the Pipe
Router window and click Branch Detail. The Branch Detail window is displayed, which
contains details of the selected branch:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
For more information on the contents of the Branch Detail window, refer to Positioning and
Locking Components.
8.2.4
Positioning and Locking Components
The user can add components to Branches after they have been routed and control where
the components are positioned. The effect that positioning and locking components will
have when a Branch is re-routed is also considered.
Note: The user can set up rules to control the selection, positioning and orientation of
components, for more information, refer to Routing Rules.
Deletable, Positionable and Locked Components
Pipe Router sees all piping components as deletable, positionable or locked. If the Branch
Detail window is displayed for a Branch that has been routed by the Pipe Router, all the
components are listed as deletable.
The components that Pipe Router creates in a Branch are described as Deletable. If the
branch is re-routed, Pipe Router will delete all the components that it has created and recreate them.
After a Branch has been routed, components can be added manually in the normal way.
Select the correct element in the Branch Members list and select Create > Component
from the main menu bar. These components are described as Positionable. If the Branch is
re-routed, these components will not be deleted, but they may be moved to fit on the new
route.
Positionable components can be locked into a given position, in which case they will not be
moved, even if the Branch is re-routed.
The order of Positionable components in the Branch Members list will be maintained, and
so will their order relative to any constraints in the Branch. For example, if a Valve is added
before a Locked Tee, the Valve will not be moved past the Tee.
The user may wish to make changes to a Branch, and then re-route it, keeping some or all
of the components that Pipe Router has added by making them positionable, rather than
deletable. The user can also lock them.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
To change the status of a component, select it from the list on the Branch Detail window,
and then select one of the options under the Modify menu on the window.
The choices are: Constraint, Toggle Head Lock, Toggle Tail Lock, Lock Position, Make
Positionable, Make Deletable, Toggle Head/Tail Relative, Head W-P, and Tail W-P.
Positioning Relative to the Head or Tail
Each component in a branch is positioned relative to the head or tail of the branch. If a
component is head relative, then Pipe Router will place that component as close as
possible to the head of the branch, allowing for other components and any constraints. If a
component is tail relative, then that component is positioned as close as possible to the tail
of the branch.
Pipe Router routes a pipe from head to tail and so all components are initially created head
relative.
The user can change the head/tail relative property of any positionable component. Select
it in the list on the Branch Detail window, and then select Modify > Toggle Head/Tail
Relative.
Head and Tail Work-points
Each Branch has a Head Work-point and a Tail Work-point. The user can insert components
between the Head (or Tail) and its work-point, which can be used, for example, to position a
Valve directly onto a Nozzle.
Moving the Head or Tail Work-point
The user can position the Head W-P after a particular component in a Branch or position the
Tail W-P before a particular component, which will enable the user to position the Valve
directly onto the Nozzle of vessel /VESS-1, then re-route the Pipe without affecting the
position of the Valve.
From the Branch Detail window, select Modify > Tail W-P to display the Modify Tail W-P
window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
From the Modify Tail W-P window, select VALVE 1, click OK.
From the Pipe Router window, select the Route: Selected option.
Pipe Router re-routes the Pipe from the Head Work-point to the Tail Work-point, which is
now positioned before VALV 1, as shown below.
The user can check the position of the valve, display the Branch Detail window for the
branch, then scroll to the bottom of the Components/Constraints list. The details are
displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:21
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Note: The Tail Work-point is now positioned after VALVE 1.
Locking and Unlocking a Component
Pipe Router enables the user to lock piping components in position, to ensure that a branch
component remains in its current position, even if the branch is re-routed.
To lock a component, from the Branch Detail window, select the component to be locked in
position, select Modify > Lock Position.
To unlock a locked component, select Modify > Make Positionable for main piping
components, or Modify > Make Deletable for Pipe Router generated components.
Manually Routing Non-orthogonal Sections
Pipe Router is an orthogonal router so if non-orthogonal sections of pipe in a branch are
required. The user will have to route these sections by hand and then lock all the
components in the section (including the start and end bend or elbow) and route the
remainder of the pipes using Pipe Router.
Aligned, Locked, Non-orthogonal Components
If two locked components with non-orthogonal arrive and/or leave direction are aligned, with
no intervening components, so that a straight piece of tube can run between them without
clashing, Pipe Router will use this route, which will also happen if the first component is
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:22
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
aligned with the head or the last component is aligned with the tail. If the straight, nonorthogonal routes clash, only orthogonal routes will be considered to avoid the clash.
The default orthogonal route between
the pump and the vessel.
Using aligned and locked elbows to
give a non-orthogonal route.
In all other cases Pipe Router will try to insert a bend or elbow to turn into an orthogonal
direction as close as possible to the component.
Non-aligned Non-orthogonal Components
If non-orthogonal components are not aligned, only orthogonal routes between them will be
considered.
Non-aligned components will still give
an orthogonal route.
Non-orthogonal Sections with Unlocked Components
If there are other, positionable, components between non-orthogonal locked components,
orthogonal routing will be used. Pipe Router may add connection components on to the
locked components, but note that no bore change (which would require the addition of a
reducer) will be permitted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:23
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
A positionable Tee has been inserted in the
Branch, which has caused Pipe Router to
revert to an orthogonal route, using additional
Elbows.
Detail of the area close to the Tee.
The route achieved with the Tee Locked.
The user can lock several non-orthogonal components in a row. For example, the user can
lock two 45 degree elbows to give a non-orthogonal section of pipe and place a locked valve
on this section of pipe. Pipe Router will then not route any part of the Branch between the
elbows, providing that straight pipe does not clash; and it will add any necessary connection
components to the valve. However, the valve must be locked: if it is positionable Pipe
Router will route orthogonally between the elbows.
It may be better to continue in a non-orthogonal direction from a nozzle until a route has
passed an obstruction, because this might give a shorter route with fewer elbows. The user
would lock the elbow at ‘A’ to give this route:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:24
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Using Rules for Minimum Tube Length
The user may find that components such as Olets and Stub-in Tees will be positioned
immediately next to another component, if your COCO tables allow. The user can use the
Upstream and Downstream Rules provided with Pipe Router to specify minimum lengths of
Tube. For more information about using rules, refer to Routing Rules.
8.2.5
Create and Use Routing Points
Routing Points can be used to constrain a route, these points are points through which a
branch will pass. The user can define the coordinates of a point and the direction in which a
branch arrives at and leaves a point.
The user can add as many routing points as required but the points must be created at the
correct position in the sequence of constraints.
Create a Routing Point
To create a routing point, select the required branch from the Pipe Router window, select
Branch Detail. The Branch Detail window is displayed. From the Branch Detail window,
select Create > Routing Point. The Create Routing Point window is displayed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:25
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The user can simply enter the coordinates on the Create Routing Point window or use the
other options available on the menu, which are similar to the normal PDMS positioning
options. Routing points can only be positioned after positionable or locked components.
By specifying a different arrive and leave direction, the user will cause a bend or elbow to be
inserted at the position of the routing point. If a change of direction is not required, select the
Through Direction and specify the direction for the pipe to take at that point. If the direction
is unset, Pipe Router will select the best direction to minimise the number of bends or
elbows used.
Use DATUMs as Routing Points
There is an option on the Create Routing Point window which allows the user to use an
existing DATUM point as a routing point. Two branches should not use the same Datum
point as a constraint since they would then clash.
If the user wishes to use a Datum where two branches meet, just one of the branches
should have the point as a constraint. For example, Branch /P1/B1 ends at a Battery Limit
and Branch P2/B1 connects to its Tail. Branch /P1/B1 should have the Datum as the last
constraint and a Free Tail. The Head of Branch /P2/B1 will be positioned at the Tail of /P1/
B1.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:26
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Moving a Routing Point
The user can modify the position of a routing point at any time. From the Pipe Router
window, select the branch to modify, click Branch Detail. The Branch Detail window is
displayed.
Select the routing point to modify from the Components/Constraints list. Select Modify >
Constraint. The Modify Routing Point window is displayed. Select one of the following
options, depending on the type of modification:
Move > Distance
The user can move a routing point a distance in a specified direction either from the current
location, or relative to another element which the user can identify using the cursor or
another method.
Move > Towards
The user can move the point a specified distance towards another element, which the user
can identify using the cursor, by specifying a named element or, which may be the head, tail
or, the next element in the branch.
Note: Make sure that the routing point is still in a sensible position in the list of constraints,
otherwise a very convoluted route may be obtained.
If the user has used a DATUM as a routing point, the standard PDMS positioning options
can be used to modify its position.
8.2.6
Routing Rules
Routing Rules are special PDMS rules which are used to control how components are
selected, positioned and orientated as Branches are routed and how Pipes are packed on
Pipe Racks and Routing Planes.
The user can use the sample routing rules supplied with the Pipe Router, or define routing
rules refer to Automatic Pipe Routing Administration.
Note: For more general information about defining rules for setting attributes, refer to
DESIGN Reference Manual.
Routing rules can be applied to individual branches or all branches within a particular site,
zone, or pipe. Rules can be applied or removed to individual components, as required.
Expressions
A routing rule consists of PDMS expressions. PDMS expressions are described in detail in
the Software Customisation Guide.
PDMS expressions consist of the following:
•
PDMS element types. For example, VALV, BRAN, TEE which also includes OWNER
and MEMBER.
•
PDMS attributes and pseudo-attributes. For example, HDIR, ABOR.
For a list of PDMS attributes, refer to Software Customisation Guide.
•
Logical operators. The operators available are
•
EQ equal to
•
NE not equal to
•
GE greater than or equal to
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:27
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
•
GT greater than
•
LE less than or equal to
•
LT less than
Keywords. There are a wide variety of keywords, for example, ALL, WITH, UP, IS.
Apply a Rule Set to a Branch
Once a rule set has been created, it can be applied to a branch. The rules will then take
effect on the components in the branch. From the Pipe Router window, select the branch
with which you want to associate a rule set.
From the Pipe Router window, select Settings > Apply Rules > To Branch to display the
Apply Rules to SELECTED window.
The user must first select the rule world which contains the rule sets to apply to the branch
from the RULE WORLD list, which contains all the Branches selected on the Pipe Router
window. From the Rule sets available in current world list, select the rule set. The rule set
can be added as high priority or low priority.
Click Add HIGH to add the rule set to the High Priority Sets list or Add LOW to add the
rule set to the Low Priority Sets list. Click Apply. The user must then route the branch to
apply the rules.
Pipe Router first checks to see if there are any rules that will apply to a component from the
high priority rule sets. If there are none then Pipe Router checks if there are any rules that
will apply in the low priority rule sets.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:28
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
From the Settings > Apply Rules options on the Pipe Router window applies the rule sets
to a site, zone or pipe. In these cases all branches which are below them in the hierarchy
will also have the rule sets applied, unless they have rule sets specifically applied.
Note: If rules are applied to an element which contains many Branches, for example, a
Zone, then each time a Branch is routed, Pipe Router will check every Branch to see
if the rules apply which may take some time.
By default, Pipe Router applies all the rules in the specified sets to a branch, providing they
are appropriate. However, the user can remove a rule from a particular component in a
branch, or add one from another rule set.
Remove a Rule Set
To remove a rule set, the user must first select the branch from the Pipe Router window,
then select Settings > Apply Rules > To Branch. The Apply Rules to SELECTED window
is displayed, the rule set to be removed must be selected. Click Remove HIGH or Remove
LOW as appropriate. Click Apply.
If a Rule Set has applied to a Pipe, Site or Zone, it will be removed from all Branches in that
Pipe, Site or Zone.
Include a Rule from another Rule Set or World
If required the user can apply a rule to a component from another rule world or rule set, from
the Pipe Router window, select the branches to apply the rule to, click Branch Detail. From
the Branch Detail window, click Component Rules. The Component Rules window is
displayed which you can use to add additional rules from the available rule sets, or from
another rule world.
From the Rules applying to current component list, select the component that the rule will
be applied to.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:29
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The letter that precedes the rule description shows where the rule was originally applied.
The letters used are:
•
B Branch
•
PPipe
•
Z Zone
•
S Site
From the Rules available list, select the rule you want to apply to the selected component,
then click Include. The rule is added to the list of rules which apply to the component. Click
Dismiss to close the Component Rules window.
Disabling a Rule from a Component
The user can prevent Pipe Router from applying a rule to a particular component in a
branch, from the Pipe Router window, select the branch which contains the component.
Click Branch Detail to display the Branch Detail window. From the Branch Detail window,
select the component from which you want to exclude the rule. Click Component Rules,
the Component Rules window is displayed.
From the list of rules that apply to the current component, select the rule you want to disable
from the component, then click Disable. Pipe Router places an asterisk (*) to the left of the
rule description to indicate that the rule is now excluded from being used.
If you want to re-enable a disabled rule, select the rule, then select Enable. The rule will
now appear in the Rules applying to current component list, preceded by a plus sign (+)
indicating that it has been included.
8.2.7
Create and Use Routing Planes
Routing planes are rectangular planes which are used to guide pipes along their length.
Routing planes are useful, for example, in routing groups of pipes along a wall or ceiling, or
simply to group pipes close together. For example two routing planes can be used, one
above the other, to group all north/south pipes together and all east/west pipes together.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:30
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Note: For Pipe Router, a Pipe Rack is defined as a group of routing planes. For more
information on Pipe Racks, refer to How Pipe Router Uses a Plane.
How Pipe Router Uses a Plane
Pipe Router ensures that pipes take the best route available from the previous constraint to
the routing plane. If the most direct route to the plane is blocked, Pipe Router selects an
alternative route which ensures that the pipe enters the plane at the earliest opportunity,
which is usually just after the obstruction. The pipe will exit from the plane at the point which
enables it to take the most direct route to the next constraint. If the most direct route to the
next constraint is blocked, the pipe will exit from the plane just before the obstruction. Pipes
are routed along the length of a routing plane.
The user can set whether the centre, top or bottom of pipes will be aligned on the routing
plane. If a pipe is insulated, the plane will automatically take the insulation into account by
positioning the pipe at a height which allows for the insulation.
Note: Allowances for shoe heights using a SHOE rule. For more information, refer to
Automatic Pipe Routing Administration.
Using More Than One Plane to Route a Branch
More than one routing plane can be used to route a branch, however there must be routing
points or locked components between the planes. If this is not the case, Pipe Router may
encounter difficulties in deciding when to leave one plane and enter another.
The user must not use two adjacent planes with the same travel direction and no
perpendicular offset between them. For turns in the same plane, planes should touch, within
100cm, corner to corner, but not overlap. The user can use groups of routing planes to
create Pipe Racks. For more information, refer to Create and Use Pipe Racks.
Create a Routing Plane
To create a routing plane make sure the zone ROUTERSITE/STRU is selected, from the
Pipe Router window, select Create > Routing Plane.
The Create Routing Plane window is displayed and a routing plane element is created and
displayed in the design hierarchy:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:31
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
In the name box, input the name of the new routing plane which is the name that is
displayed in the Members List and the Branch Detail window.
In the Description box, input the description of the routing plane, this text is not used
elsewhere in PDMS. (It may be useful for keeping a record of the plane’s purpose for future
reference).
The Position of the pipe wrt to the plane can be changed by selecting from a choice of
options in the Pipe positioning drop-down list.
Top of pipe - Positions the top of the pipe on horizontal routing planes, or in front of vertical
routing planes adjusting for any insulation. Top is the Z direction of the Plane which is shown
with an arrow.
•
Centre of pipe - Positions the centre of the pipe along the routing plane.
•
Bottom of pipe - Positions the side of the pipe below horizontal routing planes, or
behind vertical routing planes, adjusting for any insulation.
The Pipe to Pipe Gap and Packing Method options control how Pipes are packed on the
plane., for more information refer to Pipe Packing. Click OK.
The Routing Plane Dimensions window is displayed:
The user can now type in the dimensions for the routing plane:
The position from which the routing plane takes its dimensions can be changed by selecting
from a choice of options in the Anchor drop-down list:
•
Centre
•
Corner
The user can simply enter the coordinates on the Routing Plane Dimension window or use
the other options available on the menu, which are similar to the normal PDMS positioning
options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:32
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
In the Length box, input the length of the plane, from the Dir drop-down list, select the
direction that the pipes are to be routed along wrt to the plane.
In the Width box, input the width of the plane, then set the direction wrt to the width of the
plane.
Click Apply to create the routing plane or Dismiss to discard any inputs and close the
Routing Plane Dimension window.
The Routing Planes Dimensions form should now look as shown.
A vertical routing plane can be created by setting one of the Dir fields to be U or D (up or
down). The up/front direction of the plane will be indicated by a construction arrow in the
graphical view which is drawn perpendicular to the plane. To reverse the direction, reverse
either of the length or width directions, for instance from E to W.
Use a Routing Plane to Route Branches
To route a branch via a routing plane, the routing plane must be added to the constraint list
for the branch. From the Pipe Router window, select the branch to add the plane to, click
Branch Detail. The Branch Detail window is displayed which contains details of the
selected branch. Select Add > Routing Plane > Selection to display the Add Routing
Plane window:
The user can select from the available planes displayed in the Plane list.
Where the plane is inserted can be defined by selecting from a choice of options in the
Insert After drop-down list.
Click to check the Last on Plane checkbox to specify that positionable components will be
placed on the plane.
Clicking OK, the routing plane is added to the Components/Constraint list for the branch
or Cancel to discard any changes and close the Add Routing Plane window.
Route the branches, using the Pipe Router, the branches are routed via the routing plane.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:33
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Add Routing Planes Automatically
Pipe Router provides facilities to automatically add pre-defined routing planes to a branch,
which could be useful if for instance the user must run all north/south running pipes at one
elevation, and all east/west pipes at another.
Pipe Router can add either one vertical plane, or two horizontal planes, providing the
horizontal planes are oriented perpendicular to one another.
The routing planes will be added at the head of the branch. The planes must be able to be
reached directly from the head for them to be included. If there are more planes than are
required, the closest ones to the head will be chosen.
If there are constraints in the branch, such as routing points, or locked components, an
additional two horizontal or one vertical plane will be searched for at the tail of the branch.
These must be reachable directly from the tail and will be added to the Components/
Constraints list as the last constraints before the tail.
Planes will be searched for in a box defined by the head and tail of the branch. The box will
be extended by the values specified in the Pipe Router Defaults window. Only pipes that
travel along routing planes a distance greater than the Minimum Travel Distance will be
considered.
To add routing planes automatically:
From the Pipe Router window, select the branch to add routing planes to, click Branch
Detail. Select Add > Routing Plane > Automatically. The branches appear in the
Command Input & Output window but not on the Status bar. The Components/
Constraints list on the Branch Detail window will be updated with the selected routing
planes.
Components on Planes
The Last on Plane check box on the Add Routing Plane window (and the Last on Rack
checkbox on the Add Pipe Rack window) allows the user to specify that positionable and
locked components will be placed on the plane. When it is switched on, the neighbouring list
will show all the positionable and locked components in the Branch: select the one required:
all the positionable and locked components after the Plane, up to and including the
component given as Last on Plane, will be positioned on the plane.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:34
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The user can have several positionable components on a plane or rack and have more
than one locked component on a rack providing they are aligned.
•
Reducers are not permitted as positionable or locked components on a plane.
Locked Straight-through Components
Locked components on planes can be placed on the plane, but note the following
conditions:
•
Locked components will define the slot on the plane for the Branch. If there is more
than one locked component for a branch on a plane or rack, all of these components
must lie in the same slot.
•
There must be sufficiently wide gaps on the plane to fit in any component required, for
example, by using a large enough basic gap, or using WF / FF spacing with large
enough flange widths.
•
The arrive and leave directions must be along the travel direction.
Locked Bends and Elbows
Since locked bends or elbows define the start or end of the slot:
•
Locked bends and elbows will define the start or end of the slot on the travel plane as
well as the slot itself. Hence there can be at most one entry bend/elbow and one exit
bend/elbow.
•
For a locked bend or elbow used to enter the travel plane from the entry plane, the
arrive-direction must be from the entry-plane and the leave-direction along the travel
plane
•
For a locked bend or elbow used to leave the travel plane, the arrive direction must be
along the travel plane and the leave-direction must be to the exit plane.
If there are no rules about choosing entry/exit planes, Pipe Router will use the entry and exit
bend/elbow to help it to choose suitable entry/exit planes.
8.2.8
Create and Use Pipe Racks
In Pipe Router, the term pipe rack is used to describe a group of routing planes which
enable the user to automatically model the routing patterns used on a physical pipe rack.
A pipe rack is made up of routing planes (RPLAs) created within a routing plane group
(RPLG). The planes represent travel planes and entry/exit planes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:35
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The user can create pipe racks with several levels, that is several travel planes. For each
level of a pipe rack, a travel plane must be created to control the direction in which pipes
travel along the rack and at least one entry/exit plane to ensure that pipes enter onto and
exit from the rack perpendicularly, either from above or below. Each pipe rack must have at
least one travel plane and at least one entry/exit plane. The direction of travel is the X
direction (length) for travel planes and the Y direction (width) for entry and exit planes.
Pipe Router assumes that the RPLAs in an RPLG have their centres on a vertical line. The
entry and exit planes must be:
•
At least as long (in the X direction) as the travel Plane(s)
•
Wider (in the Y direction) than the travel planes
•
At least twice the bend length.
When entry/exit planes are created, the user must specify the distance by which they
overhang the travel planes. The overhang ensures that the vertical legs of pipes which enter
and exit the rack are clear of the pipe rack structure.
A pipe rack may have an upper entry/exit plane, a lower entry/exit or both, depending on the
way in which the pipes are to enter and exit a pipe rack. In a pipe rack that has several
levels, an entry/exit plane can be used by more than one level.
The user can manually associate a pipe rack with individual branches or you can tell Pipe
Router to automatically search for and make use of any pipe racks which exist within the
search volume of a branch or branches. The default search volume is the volume between
the head and tail of a pipe, and it can be extended as specified on the Pipe Router Defaults
form.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:36
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Pipe Router will select the closest pipe rack to the head in the search volume, whose
direction will take the pipe closer to the tail, and providing that when using it, the pipe will
travel on the rack for longer than the Minimum Travel Distance as defined on the Pipe
Router Defaults window.
Rack or Plane as Last Constraint
If the user is responsible for one area of a plant and a different designer is responsible for an
adjacent area, a branch may run out of the first area on a pipe rack. The user must put the
rack in the constraint list and run the branch to the area limits., by using the free tail option
from the Branch Details window. A branch has a free tail when the tail is either not
connected or is directly connected to another branch; and the tail is not locked.
A free tail can be specified immediately after a pipe-rack or plane. When a branch has a
plane or rack as its last constraint and a free tail, Pipe Router will route the branch onto the
plane or rack. It will travel in the direction implied by the tail direction until it reaches the
edge of the plane or rack and then will become the tail position.
For example: User-A is responsible for one area of a plant and User-B is responsible for an
adjacent area. A branch /P100/B1 runs out of the User-A's area on a pipe-rack. User-A puts
the rack in the constraint list with the end of the travel plane at the limits, and specifies the
tail direction and that the tail is free. PDMS Router will pack the pipe onto the rack and run it
to the end of the rack.
User-B connects the head of a Pipe /P200/B1 to the tail of /P100/B1 and begins routing from
this point. User-B must ensure that the position of the head of branch /P200/B1 is initially
unset. PDMS Router will use the Branch Lock so that the head /P200/B1moves if the
connected tail moves. If the pipe starts by travelling along an extension of the rack in UserA's area then User-B has a rack with its starting edge at the limit to represent this.
How Pipes are Routed on a Pipe Rack
By default, Pipe Router avoids pockets by first finding the travel plane. If the Head is above
the plane, the Pipe will enter from above the plane. If the Head is below the plane, the Pipe
will enter from below the plane. Exit from the plane is similarly controlled by the position of
the Tail relative to the plane.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:37
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
There are three routing rules which enable you to set which planes are used as entry, exit or
travel planes on pipe racks. The rules are:
•
Pipe rack travel plane selection
Use this rule to specify which level of a multi-level pipe rack you want to use to route a
particular type of branch.
•
Pipe Rack entry plane selection
Use this rule to specify the way in which pipes enter onto a rack, based on the contents
of the pipe. In order to use this rule, you must set up an attribute which defines the
pipe’s contents, for example vapour or liquid.
•
Pipe Rack exit plane selection
Use this rule to specify the way in which pipes exit from a rack, based on the contents
of the pipe. In order to use this rule, you must set up an attribute which defines the
pipe’s contents. If no rule exists, the entry plane will be used.
Pipe Packing Defaults
By default, Pipe Router will run pipes along Routing planes with the wall-to-wall Pipe Gap,
with any rounding factor for the positioning, as given on the Pipe Router Defaults window.
For more information about how Pipes are packed on Planes and Racks, see Pipe Packing.
Methods for Creating Pipe Racks
The user can create a pipe rack using either of the following methods:
•
Convert an existing steelwork structure into a pipe rack, using elements of the
steelwork as reference points for the position and dimensions of the planes.
•
Create the routing planes which model the behaviour of a pipe rack and then add the
steelwork later, once you are satisfied with the route. In Pipe Router, this is referred to
as a conceptual pipe rack. For more information, refer to Create a Conceptual Pipe
Rack.
Converting a Steelwork Structure to a Pipe Rack
To create a pipe rack, using elements of a steelwork structure as reference points to position
the planes. Before a pipe rack is created, pipes need to be created to route via the pipe
rack. The user must navigate to the STRU element, the current element must be a STRU,
FRMW or SBFR as routing plane groups can only be create routing plane groups inside a
these elements.
From the Pipe Router window, select Create > Pipe Rack Planes to display the Create
Pipe Rack window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:38
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
In the Name box, input a name for the pipe rack, (the name of the STRU element which
owns the pipe rack elements is shown under the Name).
The user must select an element in the steelwork, click Convert. The Pipe Rack Definition
window is displayed and the user to prompted to pick an element in the steelwork to create
the rack from.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:39
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The user can define values which apply to all the planes in the Rack. When a pipe rack is
created in this way, the following parameters have been derived from the existing structure
and cannot be changed at this point:
•
Elevation of Anchor Plane
•
Elevation between Planes
•
Number of Travel Planes
•
Number of Entry/Exit Planes.
Note: The Anchor Plane is the lowest travel plane in the rack.
The Overhang of Entry/Exit planes can be changed. The default value is set on the Pipe
Router Defaults window.
The user can set any Options to apply to all planes in the Rack. For more information on
Pipe to Pipe Gap and Packing Method, see Pipe Packing Defaults.
Click OK on the Pipe Rack Definition window, the Planes part of the Create Pipe Rack
window is now populated.
Click Dismiss to discard any changes.
Note: Routing planes are added with transparency, the degree of transparency is controlled
by the Drawlist.
Pipe Router has automatically filled in the Rack Direction, and the Dimensions of the rack.
The details of the Planes will be shown in the list of Planes at the bottom of the window. The
Plane attributes area of the window, the values shown are those for the plane selected in
the Planes list. The Plane Attributes can be edited for individual planes by changing the
values in the window and then click Include to create a new plane or Replace to replace the
plane selected in the list.
Add a Pipe Rack to a Branch
There are two ways in which branches are associated with a pipe rack:
•
Manually add a pipe rack to the list of constraints for a branch.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:40
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
Pipe Router will automatically make use of any pipe racks that exist within a certain
area between the head and tail of a branch.
Automatically Adding Pipe Racks to a Branch
To automatically add a pipe rack to the list of constraints for a branch:
Select the branches from the Pipe Router window and select Modify > Branch > Add Pipe
Rack > Automatically. The status line states which rack is being added to the constraints
lists for the selected branches.
Manually Adding Pipe Racks to a Branch
To manually add a pipe rack to the list of constraints for a branch, from the Pipe Router
window, select the branch, select Modify > Branch > Add Pipe Rack > Selection.
The Add Pipe Rack window is displayed which contains a list of the pipe racks that are
available for selection.
The user must select the required rack, click OK to add the rack to the Components/
Constraint list for the selected branch or Cancel to discard any selections and close the
Add Pipe Rack window.
The user must then route all the branches using the Pipe Router window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:41
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The default route creates pockets in three of the Pipes. By default, Pipe Router routes all
pipes that are associated with a pipe rack along the first travel plane that it finds in the
routing plane group (RPLG).
Note: Routing rules can be used to achieve a better route: for more information, refer to
Automatic Pipe Routing Administration.
Create a Conceptual Pipe Rack
The user can also route pipes using a conceptual pipe rack, that is, a pipe rack without any
associated steelwork. The steelwork can be added later.
The user can route the pipes before adding the pipe rack, which will allow you to see the
effect of the routing plane on the route taken by the pipes.
Note: Routing plane groups can only be created inside a STRU element.
Navigate to the zone ROUTERSITE/STRU, from the Pipe Router window, select Create >
Structure for Planes.
The Name Structure for RPLG window is displayed and an STRU element is created in the
design hierarchy:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:42
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
In the Name box, input the name for the structure.
Click OK to name the STRU element and close the Name Structure for RPLG window or
Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Name Structure for RPLG window.
From the Pipe Router window, select Create > Pipe Rack Planes. The Create Pipe Rack
window is displayed. The user must now define the Pipe Rack, for more information on how
to populate this window, refer to Create and Use Pipe Racks. Once the Pipe Rack has been
created, click Create Multiple planes the Pipe Rack Definition window is displayed. The
user must now define the Pipe Rack, for more information, refer to Create and Use Pipe
Racks.
Pipe Router creates an outline of all the planes for the rack and displays an arrow on the
travel planes to indicate the travel direction of the rack, which enables the user to check
whether the plane is acceptable.
Add the pipe rack to the Branches, and route the pipes The route taken by the pipes will look
as shown:
8.2.9
Pipe Packing
The user can specify the gaps between Pipes on Routing Planes, which includes Routing
Planes defining Pipe Racks. This section only deals with setting values for pipe packing
using the Pipe Router forms. Pipe packing can also be controlled by means of Rules, which
are described in Automatic Pipe Routing Administration.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:43
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Pipe Packing Defaults
By default, Pipe Router will run pipes along Routing planes with the wall-to-wall Pipe gap
given on the Pipe Router Defaults window.
•
Gaps only apply to pipes on planes or racks, use obstruction volumes to model
clearance of pipes from columns, etc.
•
Gaps will always be the sideways displacement: any vertical difference between the
centrelines of pipes will not affect packing. Very small pipes will not be packed under
the edge of very large diameter pipes.
The Pipe Gap is calculated as follows:
With a 50mm wall-to-wall gap, the centre of a branch of OD 200mm will be placed 225mm
from the centre of an adjacent branch of OD 150mm.
The Pipe Router Defaults form also has a Pipe gap rounding option, which ensures that
the centres of pipe are positioned at rounded coordinates relative to the edge of the routing
plane. Coordinates are always rounded up. If no rounding is required, leave this value as 0.
PDMS Router obtains values from the OD (for the current Pipe) or the geometry (for
adjacent Pipes), and assume that these are consistent.
For example, consider two Pipes, OD 145mm and 60mm, on a plane for which the gap is
100mm. If the rounding factor is set to 10, the centre of the first Pipe will be placed at 80
(rather than 72.5). The centre-to-centre distance will be:
72.5 + 100 + 30 = 202.5
which will be rounded up to 210. Hence the centre of the second Pipe will be placed at 290:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:44
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Flanges on Routing Planes
If the user needs to run sections of Pipes which include Flanges along routing planes, the
user can specify that the gap value will be applied as a wall-to-flange (WF) gap, if the
flanges can be staggered, or as a flange-to-flange (FF) gap, if the flanges are side-by-side
on the plane. The default is wall-to-wall (WW) spacing. The spacing is controlled by the
PLWW attribute of the RPLA. PLWW can be set to WW, WF or FF.
The Flange spacing options can be set in the following ways:
•
For single routing planes
set the options on the Create Routing Plane window when Create > Routing Plane
on the Pipe Router window menu is selected. The user can also change the settings
for an existing routing plane on the RPLA Specification window, displayed when
Modify > Routing Plane > Specification on the Pipe Router window is selected.
•
For pipe racks
set the options on the Pipe Rack Definition window, when the user creates a pipe
rack. The user can also change the settings for an existing Pipe Rack on the Modify
Pipe Rack window, when Modify > Pipe Rack is selected on the Pipe Router
window.
The flange width is the width of the default flange (i.e. the flange which is obtained with a
SELECT command) for the branches at their current bore, even if there are other flanges on
the pipe rack.
Notes:
The flange width is taken as 0 if:
•
No rule is applied.
•
If the user tries to specify WF or FF spacing between branches either of which does not
have a default flange.
If necessary the user can change the spacing using the additional pipe-specific gap on
the Pipe Router Defaults window.
•
When wall-to-flange spacing is used, the greater of the flange widths for the current
pipe and the adjacent pipe will be added to the wall-to-wall spacing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:45
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
When flange-to-flange spacing is used, the flange width of both pipes will be added to
the wall-to-wall gap.
The size of flanges is found using the Flange Width (FLWI) rule, which is applied to the
default flange for each branch at its current bore. For more information about routing rules,
refer to Automatic Pipe Routing Administration.
8.2.10
Import a P&ID File
If the P&ID system is configured so that it is capable of outputting data for use in PDMS, the
user can load your P&ID file into Pipe Router. For information about configuring P&ID output
so that it is suitable for input to Pipe Router, refer to Importing Data from P&ID Files.
The user must navigate to the site or zone where to load the pipes from the P&ID. From the
Pipe Router window, select Create > Add New Pipes from P&ID to display the Import
P&ID window:
In the Import File text box, input the directory and file name of the P&ID file to load.
Alternatively, click Browse to display the File Browser which contains a list of the available
files, then select the required file.
If the user would like to keep a copy of the log file produced during import, in the Log File
box, input a file name. Alternatively, click Browse to display the File Browser which
contains a list of the available files, then select the required file.
The options can be defined by selecting from the Options part of the Import P&ID window:
•
Modify Elements, do not ask. - Pipe Router will modify Pipes and Branches which are
in both the existing model and the P&ID file. If this option is not selected, the user will
be prompted to decide whether to modify the element or not. Minor elements (Valves,
Tees etc.) will be made unnamed if they already exist, whether this button is on or off.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:46
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
Do NOT delete generated macro - During import, a macro is created to generate all
the components. Normally this file is deleted after import, but if you select this option it
will be kept.
•
Show log file after import - Displays the log file. The log file can be displayed later
using the Display > Log file option on the menu at the top of the form.
•
Unname tees after import - If an element has a name in DESIGN, Design Manager
will try to find the name in PEGS. Tees do not exist in PEGS, and so each Tee found
will generate an error if this option is not selected.
To import the P&ID file, click Run Import.
The Modified Pipes & Branches list will show any existing Pipes and Branches that have
been modified when the P&ID was read in. As far as possible, Pipe Router will try and keep
any attributes that have already been set in the model, and any constraints that have been
added to Branches. However, if the P&ID file requires components to be re-ordered,
elements will be deleted and re-created in PDMS, resulting in attribute settings and
constraint associations to be lost.
Messages generated are also output to the Command Input & Output window, if it is
displayed. The log contains messages relating to the progress of the import operation, and
any errors or warnings. In particular, the Branch Head must be positioned, if the HREF is not
set.
The import file is processed in two passes:
Pass 1 will look for any components that appear more than once. For example, in PEGS, a
three-way valve will appear on three branches. The import process will remove the Valve
from the branches that have the component set as a TREF, leaving it as a member of the
main branch only.
Pass 2 will generate the macro to create the elements.
If there is no Piping specification set in the P&ID file, Pipe Router will use the default Piping
specification set in the Default Specification window, selected from the Pipework
Application main menu bar.
8.3
Automatic Pipe Routing Administration
Routing Rules are special PDMS rules which are used to control, for example, how Pipe
Router selects, positions and orientates components as Branches are routed, and also how
Pipes are packed on Pipe Racks and Routing Planes.
Note: For more general information about defining rules for setting attributes, refer to
DESIGN Reference Manual.
The user can apply routing rules to individual branches or all branches within a particular
site, zone, or pipe, and the user can also apply rules to individual components and remove
rules from individual components, as required.
Routing Rule Purposes
There are different types of routing rules, which are used for different controls on the route.
Rules are identified by their Purpose (PURP) attribute, and unlike other elements in PDMS,
the user cannot create different, user-defined purposes for routing rules.
The routing rules available are listed below, identified by their PURP attribute, and with a
short description. The purpose is set to a four-letter code, but it is sometimes shown as a
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:47
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
more descriptive text on the PDMS Router forms. How each rule is applied is described in
detail in How Routing Rules are Applied.
Pre-processing
PRPR
All rules with this Purpose will be executed before a Branch is
routed.
Selection
BEND
Bend or elbow selection: controls whether a bend or elbow is used
for changing the direction of a pipe
REDU
Reducer type: specified when concentric or eccentric reducers are
used
Positioning
DNSM
Downstream pipe requirement: the length of pipe required
downstream to the next component
UPSM
Upstream pipe requirement: the length of pipe required upstream
from the previous component
ELEV
Component elevation: absolute or relative elevation of a
component
LOCA
Component location: 3D position of a component
Orientation
MAJO
Orientate on major axis: positioning on vertical or horizontal pipe
segment.
MINO
Orientate on minor axis: such as the orientation of a handwheel
Clash exclusion
CLEX
These rules are used to allow specified types of element to clash.
Pipe racks (and routing planes)
TRAV
Pipe Rack travel plane selection: controls which pipe rack travel
plane is used to route a particular type of branch
ENTR
Pipe Rack entry plane selection: controls which pipe rack entry
plane is used to route a particular type of branch
EXIT
Pipe Rack exit plane selection: controls which pipe rack exit plane
is used to route a particular type of branch
SHOE
Shoe height requirement
WEIG
Identify heavy pipe
ADGP
Extra gap required on plane or rack
FLWI
Flange width on plane or rack
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:48
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Post-processing
POPR
All rules with this Purpose will be executed after a Branch has
been routed.
How Routing Rules are Constructed
Routing rules consist of PDMS expressions which define:
•
Selection: the elements to which the rule applies.
All rules must have a selection expression.
•
A Logical test which evaluates to TRUE or FALSE. For example, (ATTRIB ADIR EQ D)
specifies that the arrive direction is down.
Rules which use logical expressions are called logical rules. A Rule which does not have a
logical expression is called a real rule, because its action (see below) is a real expression.
•
The Action which PDMS will carry out. The actions for logical rules will be carried out if
the Logical test evaluates to False. For example,
(AXES PP 3 IS N) orientates a valve so that the P3 axis is in the north direction.
Actions
The Logical expression in a rule tests whether or not the component satisfies the rule. If not,
that is, if the logical expression evaluates to False, and the rule has an action, the action will
be applied. Pipe Router will then re-test the component. If the logical expression still
evaluates to False, the Action will be reversed.
•
Logical rules may or may not have actions.
•
Real rules must always have actions.
Of the logical rules, the following use actions:
•
Minor axis
•
Elevation. If no action is specified, and the rule fails, a message is output.
•
Location. If no action is specified, and the rule fails, a message is output.
•
Upstream pipe requirement
•
Downstream pipe requirement
•
Pre-processing
•
Post-processing
If the user does not define an action for these rules, then the default action is taken, which
depends on the rule.
Using PML Functions in Routing Rules
The Logical and Action expressions in Routing rules can call PML functions, which allows
the user to define much more complex logical tests and actions than can be done using
simple expressions. A function is called by setting the rule action to a text string which is the
name of the .pmlobj file. The file will contain the object definition, followed by a method
definition.
The function must be defined using fixed names for the following elements:
CEREF
The DBREF of the element the rule applies to.
RESULT
The returned boolean result. (Logical parts of rules only.)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:49
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
RULEMETHOD
The method which is applied.
OBSREF
The DBREF of the Element clashing with the Branch. (Clash
exclusion rule only).
Examples of calling PML functions are given in the following sections:
Pre-processing rules
Refer to Pre-processing
Minor Axis orientation
Refer to Orientation
Clash exclusion
Refer to Clash Exclusion
Post-processing rules
Refer to Post-processing
How Routing Rules are Applied
The following sections describe in detail which expressions are required by each type of
rule, and how the rules are applied. Most of the examples are taken from Rules supplied
with the product. To see more examples, select Settings > Routing Rules from the Pipe
Router window, which will display the Routing Rules window. Select a Rule Set, then
select a Rule from the list. To see the expressions in the rule, select Modify, and the Rule
Attributes window will be displayed.
Pre-processing
Pre-processing (PRPR)
Logical, will have Action
All rules with this Purpose will be executed before a Branch is routed. The Action will
normally be a PML function, which must have been defined before the rule is applied.
Typically this type of rule will be used where it is simpler to have a single rule to create,
position and orientate several components rather than have individual rules. For example:
•
To build pipes of fixed geometry using a single rule to position and orientate all the
components.
•
To build templates for parts of branches, for example, a control loop at the start of a
branch.
The Selection part of the rule will identify a key component: for example, you could identify
Valves which will require control loops by setting a UDA to a certain value, and then setting
the selection expression to select all the Valves with the given attribute value.
The PML function will then create, position and orientate the components and finally set the
head working point attribute to the last component covered by the rule. PDMS Router will
then take over and route the Branch.
A suitable PML function is shown following. Note that at the end of the positioning and
orientating commands, the RLOC attribute is set to 0 (Locked).
define object PREPROCESS
member .CEREF is DBREF
endobject
define method .RULEMETHOD()
if ( !THIS.CEREF.owner.phdir.east gt 0 ) then
prev tee
ori and p3 is n
dist 200
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:50
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
rloc 0
$!THIS.CEREF
ori pa is w
pos polar e dist 350 from prev tee
rloc 0
next tee
ori pa is w and p3 is n
pos polar e dist 250 from pl of $!THIS.CEREF
rloc 0
valv 1 of cref
ori pa is w and p3 is up
at w 500 wrt $!THIS.CEREF
rloc 0
elseif ( !THIS.CEREF.owner.phdir.east lt 0 ) then
prev tee
ori and p3 is s
dist 200
rloc 0
$!THIS.CEREF
ori pa is e
pos polar w dist 350 from prev tee
rloc 0
next tee
ori pa is e and p3 is s
pos polar w dist 250 from pl of $!THIS.CEREF
rloc 0
valv 1 of cref
ori pa is e and p3 is up
at w 600 wrt $!THIS.CEREF
rloc 0
elseif ( !THIS.CEREF.owner.phdir.north lt 0 ) then
prev tee
ori and p3 is e
dist 200
rloc 0
$!THIS.CEREF
ori pa is n
pos polar s dist 350 from prev tee
rloc 0
next tee
ori pa is n and p3 is e
pos polar s dist 250 from pl of $!THIS.CEREF
rloc 0
valv 1 of cref
ori pa is n and p3 is up
at w 500 wrt $!THIS.CEREF
rloc 0
elseif ( !THIS.CEREF.owner.phdir.north gt 0 ) then
prev tee
ori and p3 is w
dist 200
rloc 0
$!THIS.CEREF
ori pa is s
pos polar n dist 350 from prev tee
rloc 0
next tee
ori pa is s and p3 is w
pos polar n dist 250 from pl of $!THIS.CEREF
rloc 0
valv 1 of cref
ori pa is s and p3 is up
at w 500 wrt $!THIS.CEREF
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:51
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
rloc 0
endif
endmethod
The input to Pipe Router would be Pipes with a main Branch with the following sequence of
components defined:
•
Tee
•
Valve with Stype CH
•
Tee
There would also be a second Branch, owning a Valve, with the Branch Head and Tail
connected to the two Tees in the main Branch, which will form the control loop.
The rule to call the function could be defined as shown:
The rule is applied to the elements required in the normal way. An example of the control
loop created is shown in the following picture.
Note: Pipe Router will lock the Tees and the Valves in position, so that they cannot be
moved by any rules which are subsequently applied.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:52
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Selection
Bend or elbow selection (BEND)
Logical, no Action
Used to choose the type of component used to change direction. For example, the selection
expression could be:
ALL BRAN MEM WITH ATTRIB ABORE LE 65
and the logical:
( ATTRIB TYPE EQ ’BEND’ )
makes sure that all Branches with bores less than or equal to 65 will use Bends rather than
Elbows.
The default method of changing direction, set on the Pipe Router Defaults window, is using
Elbows.
The default method of changing direction, set on the Pipe Router Defaults window, is using
a Rule. The rule specifies that small bore pipes change direction using Bends
Note: The rule will only be applied if you set the Change direction using option on the
Pipe Router Defaults window to Rule.
Reducer Selection (REDU)
Logical, no Action
To specify whether concentric or eccentric reducers are selected. For example, if the default
reducers in a specification are eccentric, and you want concentric reducers in vertical
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:53
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
sections of pipe but eccentric reducers in horizontal sections, the Selection expression in
the rule could be:
ALL REDU WITH ( ATTRIB ADIR EQ U AND ATTRIB ADIR EQ D )
The logical expression to specify eccentric reducers in all the selected cases would be:
( ATTRIB STYP EQ ‘CON’ )
The default reducer in the Specification
is eccentric.
The rule specifies that reducers on vertical
legs are concentric
Positioning
There are two pseudo-attributes which are particularly useful in positioning expressions:
STAP
is the length of straight tube before the component.
STLE
is the length of straight tube after the component.
The lengths are measured from the component up to one of the following:
•
A change of direction
•
A change of bore
•
The start or end of the branch
•
One of the following components: VALV, VFWA, VTWA, FILT, PCOM, TEE and
CROSS. (Any connection components such as flanges or gaskets are ignored.)
Downstream pipe requirement (DNSM)
Logical, can have Action
Used to control the length of straight pipe which is downstream from the previous
component. If the rule logical fails, the action, if it exists, will be applied. The action should
be an expression that moves the component a distance from the previous to ensure a
straight length of pipe. For example:
Selection
ALL TEE WITH ( ATTRIB APOS EQ ATTRIB LPOS )
Logical
( ATTRIB STLE GT ATTRIB ABORE * 10 )
You can omit the action by setting the Action field on the form to unset, but the result may
be unpredictable, particularly if other rules are being applied, and it is not recommended. If
no action exists, and component positioning is head relative, the component will be moved
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:54
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
2/3 the distance along the leg, and then re-tested. If component positioning is tail relative,
the preceding component will be moved if necessary when it is positioned.
A Tee is positioned by default.
The rule is applied and the Tee is moved 2/3 of the distance along the leg between the
Elbow and the Routing Plane
Upstream pipe requirement (UPSM)
Logical, can have Action
The rule controls the length of straight pipe which is upstream from the next component.
Selection
ALL TEE WITH ( ATTRIB APOS EQ ATTRIB LPOS )
Logical
ATTRIB STAP GT ATTRIB ABORE * 10
An example of an action is:
POLAR AXES PREVPP DIST 4 IN FROM PREVPP
where the POLAR AXES keywords are used to specify a position in terms of a distance in a
given direction from a point, and PREVPP is the previous p-point.
The user can omit the action by setting the Action field on the window to unset, but the
result may be unpredictable, particularly if other rules are being applied, and it is not
recommended. If no action exists, and component positioning is tail relative, the component
will be moved 1/3 of the upstream distance, and then re-tested. If component positioning is
head relative, the following component will be moved if necessary when it is positioned.
Elevation (ELEV)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Logical, can have Action
8:55
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The rule controls the elevation of a component. The following example uses the CLOSEST
keyword in the logical expression to specify that components must be positioned at a height
greater or equal to 0.61m vertically above an EQUI whose purpose is FLOO.
Selection
ALL BRANCH MEMBERS
Logical
ATTRIB UP WRT CLOSEST EQUI WITH ( PURP EQ ’FLOO’ ) DOWN GE .61M
A position on the closest vertical segment of pipe equal to the required elevation will be
found. If no position on the existing pipe can be found, the action will be applied with the
position adjusted to minimise the use of bends or elbows.
If the logical test is False, any action set will be applied.
Location (LOCA)
Logical, can have Action
Used to position a component at a given location. The following example is a test for a
component in a sub-branch being positioned at p-point 4 of the connecting component in the
owning branch:
ATTRIB APOS EQ ATTRIB PPOS 4 OF HREF OF OWNER
If the logical test fails, the action will be applied and the test repeated. If it fails again, a
message is output.
The corresponding action expression would be:
ATTRIB PPOS 4 OF HREF OF OWNER
To position the component at p-point 4 of the connecting component in the owning branch.
Orientation
Major axis
Logical, no Action
Controls the major orientation of the component, which is the arrive/leave axis. For
example:
ATTRIB ADIR EQ D
If this fails, the component will be moved to each leg in turn until one is found that passes.
No action is allowed.
Minor axis
Logical, can have Action
Controls the minor orientation of a component, which is the axis perpendicular to the arrive/
leave axis. Frequently this axis is the direction of a valve handwheel. For example:
ATTRIB P3 DIR EQ D
If the rule logical fails, the action will be applied. If the logical then fails, the component will
be moved to another leg, and re-tested. If the component clashes, it will be moved along the
leg and then re-tested.
If there is no action, the component will be rotated in increments of 90 degrees to find a nonclashing orientation which passes the rule. If after four attempts it still fails, the component
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:56
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
will be moved along the leg and retried. If no suitable positions are found on the leg, the
component will be moved to the next leg and the procedure repeated.
Examples using PML Functions
The following example shows how you could call PML functions for the Logical and Action
expressions in a Minor Axis rule for positioning a Valve at and angle of 45 degrees.
First, the Logical expression will be set to ( 'minological' ), which will call the following PML
function:
define object MINOLOGICAL
member .CEREF
is DBREF
member .RESULT
is BOOLEAN
endobject
define method .RULEMETHOD()
!THIS.RESULT = false
if ( !THIS.CEREF.ADIR.east ne 0 ) then
!THIS.RESULT = ( !THIS.CEREF.PDIR[3].up eq 0.707107 and !THIS.CEREF.PDIR[3].north lt 0 )
elseif ( !THIS.CEREF.ADIR.north ne 0 ) then
!THIS.RESULT = ( !THIS.CEREF.PDIR[3].up eq 0.707107 and !THIS.CEREF.PDIR[3].east gt 0 )
. . .
. . .
endif
endmethod
If the Logical test evaluates to False, that is, if P3 does not have the specified orientation,
the Action will be carried out.
The Action expression is set to ( 'minoaction' ), which orientates the P3 direction of the
component:
define object MINOACTION
member .CEREF
is DBREF
endobject
define method .RULEMETHOD()
if ( !THIS.CEREF.ADIR.east ne 0 ) then
ORI and p3 is s 45 d
elseif ( !THIS.CEREF.ADIR.north ne 0 ) then
ORI and p3 is e 45 d
endif
endmethod
Clash Exclusion
Clash Exclusion (CLEX)
Logical
A Clash Exclusion rule allows certain clashes to be approved in advance. A use for this is
specifying that only non hazardous pipes are allowed in certain areas. Clash exclusion rules
can use expressions or functions.
Example using Expressions
For example, the following rule can be used where two groups of elements are always
allowed to clash. In this case, Branches carrying radioactive material have their PURP
attribute set to RADI. All Zones which are safe for humans to enter have their PURP set to
HUMA. The rule allows all Branches whose PURP is not set to RADI to pass through all
human zones:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:57
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Selection
ALL BRAN MEM WITH ( PURP OF BRAN NEQ ‘RADI’ )
Logical
( PURP OF ZONE EQ ‘HUMA’ )
The selection part of the rule is used to identify the Branch or Branch member which is
clashing and the logical applies to the obstruction clashing with the Branches.
Example using a PML Function
If a more complicated solution is needed, use a PML function. A simple example is
define object CLASH
member .CEREF
is DBREF
member .OBSREF
is DBREF
member .RESULT
is BOOLEAN
endobject
define method .RULEMETHOD()
!THIS.RESULT = false
if ( !THIS.CEREF.owner.name eq '/ROUTE2-1' and
!THIS.OBSREF.owner.name eq '/OBSTR42' ) then
!THIS.RESULT = true
endif
endmethod
Pipe Racks and Routing Planes
Automatic routing along Pipe Racks is described in Create and Use Pipe Racks. In
summary, Pipe Router sees a Pipe Rack as a group of routing planes. Each plane will have
its FUNCTION attribute set, for example to UTIL for planes which are going to route utilities
pipes. The user should also ensure that Branches which will be routed along Pipe Racks
have their PURPOSE attribute set appropriately, so that you can identify which Branches
should be routed along a given plane.
Note: In these rules, the selection expression selects Branches. The logical test is applied
to the Planes on the Pipe Rack.
Travel Plane Selection
Logical, no Action
To control which travel plane of a pipe rack is used to carry a particular branch. An example
of the selection expression, which would apply the rule to all Branches to with Purpose set
to COOLING, is:
ALL BRAN WITH ( PURP EQ ’COOLING’)
An example of the logical test, which will route the selected Branches along the Plane with
its Function set to UTIL would be:
FUNCTION EQ ’UTIL’
Note: It is important to use the FUNCTION attribute in rule writing for the rule logical since
the PURPOSE attribute is used internally.
Entry Plane Selection
Logical, no Action
To determine which entry plane is used to control a branch as it enters a pipe rack. Normally
there will be one above and one below, to allow for branches with both liquid and vapour
contents to use the rack. An example of the selection might be:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:58
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
ALL BRAN WITH ( PURP EQ ’COOLING’ AND :CONT EQ ’GAS’)
Note: That both the PURPOSE and:CONTENT attributes would need to be set on the
branch for the rule selection to take effect.
An example of the test could be:
FUNCTION EQ ’UTIL’.
which would cause pipes containing gas for cooling to use the upper entry/exit plane to get
to/from the UTIL travel plane.
Note: It is important to use the FUNCTION attribute in rule writing for the rule logical since
the PURPOSE attribute is used internally.
Exit Plane Selection
Logical, no Action
The rule will determine which exit plane is used to control a branch as it exits a pipe rack.
Normally there will be one above and one below, to allow for branches with both liquid and
vapour contents to use the rack. An example of the selection might be:
ALL BRAN WITH ( PURP EQ ’COOLING’ AND :CONT EQ ’GAS’)
Note: That both the PURPOSE and :CONTENT attributes would need to be set on the
branch for the rule selection to take effect.
An example of the test could be:
FUNCTION EQ ’UTIL’
which would cause pipes containing gas for cooling to use the upper entry/exit plane to get
to/from the UTIL travel plane.
Shoe Height
Real
Branches routed via planes or pipe-racks can be offset by a user-specified distance from the
plane to allow for shoe-heights. The shoe-height is specified using rules with PURPose
SHOE.
For example:
Selection:
( ALL BRAN ALL BRAN MEM ) WITH ( ISPEC OF BRAN NE NULREF )
Action:
(PH OD * 0.25 )
Note: The Action specifies the distance from the Pipe OD. Subtract the insulation thickness
if the shoe height if measured from the bottom of the Pipe.
Heavy Pipe
Logical, no Action
The user can specify that heavy pipes are placed at the edges of routing planes and light
ones at the centre. When choosing this packing method, the PLPM attribute of the plane will
be set to WEIG, and Pipe Router will look for a weight rule to determine whether pipes are
light or heavy.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:59
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The logical expression will evaluate to False if the pipe is to be placed at the edge of the
rack.
For example:
Selection:
ALL BRAN MEM
Logical:
( ATTRIB ABOR LT 300 MM)
All Pipes with Bore greater than 300mm will be placed at the edge of the rack.
For more information on Pipe packing methods, refer to Packing Methods.
Extra Gap
Real
Allows the user to specify an additional gap between some pipes, for example, very hot
pipes.
Additional gaps are determined by rules applied to the default bend or elbow of a branch.
For example, for branches with temperature greater than 500 degrees, the following rule will
give an additional gap of 0.2 times the arrive bore of the component:
Selection:
ALL BRAN MEM WITH ( TEMP OF OWNER GE 500 )
Action:
( ATTRIB ABOR * 0.2)
For more details of additional gaps, see Additional Gaps.
Flange Width (FLWI)
Real
Flange width rules are used to set the gap between Pipes on Routing Planes and Pipe
Racks when the Pipe run on the plane includes Flanges. The rule is applied to the default
Flange for the Pipe. The gap can be calculated in several ways.
Example 1
Selection:
ALL FLAN
Action:
( 0.25 * ATTRIB ABORE )
Example 2
Uses flange parameters:
Selection:
ALL FLAN
Action:
ACTION ( CPARA[2] + CPARA[3] )
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:60
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Example 3
The next example uses a property of the Flange, which would be specified in a dataset as
follows:
Owner /FLANGE.DATA.SET
Description Flange width Property
DKEY FLWI
Ptype BORE
Pproperty ( ATTRIB ABOR * 1.5 )
Dproperty 0
Purpose unset
Number 0
Dtitle unset
Punits mm
Ruse 0
The rule could then be:
Selection:
ALL FLAN WITH ( PSPE EQ /A150)
Action:
ACTION ( PROP FLWI )
For more detailed information about how Flange widths are calculated, refer to Flanges on
Routing Planes.
Post-processing
Post-processing (POPR)
Logical, will have Action
All rules with this Purpose will be executed after a Branch has been successfully routed.
They can be used to add extra details to a Branch such as Drains and Vents or slope the
line. The Action will normally be a PML function, which must have been defined before the
rule is applied.
The following example creates an expansion loop:
define object POSTPROCESS
member .CEREF
is DBREF
endobject
define method .RULEMETHOD()
exit
$!THIS.CEREF
new elbo
select
ori and pl is up
dist 1000
rloc 2
new elbo
select
ori and pl is $!THIS.CEREF.LDIR
dist 300
rloc 2
new elbo
select
ori and pl is d
dist 300
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:61
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
rloc 2
new elbo
select
ori and pl is $!THIS.CEREF.LDIR
dist 300
rloc 2
router
endmethod
The following illustrations show a Branch, with and without the Post-processing Rule
applied.
8.3.1
Create and Edit Routing Rules
PDMS stores rules within a hierarchy. There are two administrative elements within the
hierarchy:
•
Rule World, whose type is RLWL
•
Rule Set, whose type is RLST
PDMS stores routing rules, whose type is GRUL, within a rule set. When the user can create
a new rule, define the type of rule by selecting the correct purpose, the defining the
expressions within it. The rule can now be applied to individual branches or all the branches
in a particular site, zone or pipe.
By default, all rules in the rule sets applied to a branch will be considered to be applied to
each component in the branch. However, the user can also disable any of the rules, or apply
rules from other rule sets, to any individual component.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:62
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
A sample set of rules is provided with Pipe Router in the Sample Project. The Rule World is
named /PIPES-RULES, and it owns several rule sets. The rules in the rule sets are
examples which the user can use to build a customised set, and do not necessarily
represent good engineering practise.
To create a rule world:
From the Pipe Router window, select Settings > Routing Rules. The Routing Rules
window is displayed. Select Create > Rule World. The Create Rule World window is
displayed. In the Name box, input a name for the rule world, click OK to create the Rule
World.
The rule world is created and is displayed in the Members List. The user must now create a
rule set within the rule world.
To create a rule set:
Ensure that at the level of the Rule World in which you want to create the rule set is
selected. From the Routing Rules window, select Create > Rule Set. The Create Rule Set
window is displayed. In the Name box, input a name for the Rule Set. In the Function box,
input the function of the rule set. (The function is simply a descriptive term which enables
you and other users to identify the purpose of the rules contained within the rule set.) Click
OK to create the Rule Set.
The set is displayed in the Members List. The user can now create routing rules and store
them within the rule set.
Create a Routing Rule:
From the Pipe Router window, select Settings > Routing Rules to display the Routing
Rules window:
Select where the rule is to be stored by first selecting the rule world from the Current Rule
World drop-down list, and then the rule set from the Current Rule Set drop-down list.
To create a new rule, select Create > Rule > New. The Create Rule window is displayed
and a new rule element (GRUL) is created in the design hierarchy.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:63
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
To name the new rule:
In the Name box, input a name for the new rule element, which is the name of the rule
element (GRUL) that will be displayed in the design hierarchy.
Click OK to name the new rule element, close the Create New Rule window and display the
Rule Attributes window:
Click Cancel to discard inputs and close the Create New Rule window.
In the Description box, input a description for the rule. The description will be displayed in
the Routing Rules window.
Select a purpose for the rule from the Purpose drop-down list.
In the Selection box, input an expression. For example: ALL VALV WITH (ATTRIB STYP
EQ ‘GATE’), this expression tells Pipe Router that the rule is applicable to all valves that
have their attribute STYP set to GATE, that is, all gates valves.
In the Logical box, input an expression. For example: ( ATTRIB PDIR 3 EQ N ), this
expression checks whether or not the direction of P3 on each gate valve is set to north. If it
is, then the gate valve meets the criteria of the rule and no action is taken. If the direction of
P3 is not north, then Pipe Router performs the action expression described in the next step.
In the Action box, input an expression. For example: (AXES PP 3 IS N AND AXES PL IS
AXES PL OF PREV), this expression tells Pipe Router to change the direction of P3 to
north, and make the leave direction the same as for the previous component.
The user can select the attribute of the CE, click Current Rule. The Rule Attributes
window is now populated with the details for the current rule.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:64
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
To test the rule:
The user must set the extent of the test (World, Site, Zone, Pipe), from the Test Rule dropdown list, which will perform the selection operation defined for the rule, then perform the
logical test for each component selected, and report which components passed and which
failed. The report is displayed on the Rules Testing window.
Click OK to create the routing rule. The user can now apply the rule to a Branch in the usual
way.
Click Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Rule Attributes window.
To copy a rule:
To copy an existing rule, from the Routing Rules window, select Create > Rule > Copy.
The Create Copy Rule window is displayed:
To name the copied rule:
In the Name box, input a name for the copied element, which is the name of the rule
element (GRUL) that will be displayed in the design hierarchy.
Click OK to name the copied element and close the Create Copy Rule window. The Rule
Attributes window is displayed:
Click Cancel to discard inputs and close the Create Copy Rule window
When the user creates a copy of a rule, the Rule Attributes window is displayed, filled in
with the details of the copied rule. The user can then simply edit the details of the rule, which
enables the user to select an existing rule and use its details as the starting point for a new
rule or modify the details to suit the user’s purpose.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:65
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Modify a Routing Rule
The user can edit a routing rule, using as an example the sample rules supplied in the rule
set TRAVEL-RULES. The rules are modified to give a better route for the pipe rack example
in Create and Use Pipe Racks.
Using Rules to Specify How Pipes Use a Pipe Rack
The user can specify the type of pipes you want to route on each level of a pipe rack, using
routing rules. For example, the user can tell Pipe Router to place all process pipes on the
bottom level of a rack and all utility pipes on the top level of a rack. If there are more than
one entry/exit plane, the user can specify the way in which pipes enter onto and exit from a
particular level. For example, have all liquid utility pipes climbing onto a travel plane and all
gas utility pipes dropping onto the same travel plane.
For example, the user can edit the example pipe rack rules that are supplied with Pipe
Router and apply them to avoid the pockets created by the default route.
To modify a routing rule, from the Pipe Router window, select Settings > Routing Rules to
display the Routing Rules window:
The Rules available are supplied in the sample project. Make sure that the Current Rule
World is set to PIPE-RULES and the Current Rule Set is TRAVEL-RULES. There are three
Rules supplied: a Travel Plane Rule, an Entry Plane rule and an Exit Plane rule.
To see the expressions in the Travel Rule, the user must select the rule in the list and then
select Modify > Rule on the Routing Rules window. The Rule Attribute window is
displayed populated with the attributes for Travel Rule.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:66
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
From the Rule Attributes window, note that:
•
The Selection text box contains the expression
ALL BRAN WITH ( ATTRIB PURP OF OWNER EQ PROC )
which means that the Rule can be applied to all Branches owned by Pipes whose
PURP attribute is set to PROC.
•
The Logical text box contains the expression:
( ATTRIB FUNC EQ 'PROCESS' )
which means that the Travel Planes must have their FUNC attribute set to
PROCESS.
•
To see the expressions in other rules, select the rule in the list on the Routing Rules
window and click Current Rule on the Rule Attributes window.
•
The Entry and Exit Plane rules as supplied both have their Logical expressions set to:
( ATTRIB FUNC EQ 'ENTRY' )
The next step is to change the Logical expression for the Exit Rule.
Select the Exit rule in the list on the Routing Rules window and click Current Rule on the
Rule Attributes window. Change the Logical expression to be:
( ATTRIB FUNC EQ 'EXIT' )
Before the user can test the rules, the Pipe PURP attribute must be set to PROC.
•
Make Pipe 2001 the Current Element
•
Select Modify > Attributes Global from the Pipework Application main menu bar,
the Global Attribute Change window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:67
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The user must now select an attribute, select Purpose from the list of attributes. Click to
select All attribute data. In the with box, input PROC.
Click Apply to change the global attributes and close the Global Attribute Change window
or Dismiss to discard any inputs and close the Global Attribute Change window.
From the Rule Attributes window, the user can now test the rule:
For example, the exit plane rule. Select the exit Plane rule in the list and make sure that
Pipe 2001 is the Current Element. Set Test Rule to Pipe.
The Rule Testing window will be displayed, which shows the user that 1 Branch has been
selected for the rule but 0 Plane. No Planes have been selected because there are no
Planes with Function set to EXIT.
To modify the functions of the planes in the Pipe Rack:
Make the Pipe Rack the current element and select Modify > Pipe Rack from the Pipe
Router window.
On the Modify Pipe Rack window, change the Function of the planes as follows:
Level 1 Upper Entry/Exit Plane:
EXIT
Level 1 Travel Plane:
PROC
Level 1 Lower Entry/Exit Plane:
ENTRY
Associate the Rule with the Branches required. Select the Branch 2001/B1 on the Routing
Rules form. Select Settings > Branch Rules from the menu on the PDMS Router form. On
the Branch Rules form, set Apply rule sets to All Selected Branches. Select HIGH, and
the rule will be added to the form.
Now re-route the Pipe. A more satisfactory route will be obtained.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:68
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Deleting a Rule World, Rule Set or Routing Rule
To delete a rule world, rule set, or routing rule, the user must navigate to the rule world and
rule set to be deleted from the Current Rule World and Current Rule Set drop-down lists.
The user must then select the rule to be deleted from the routing rules list. Select Delete >
Rule World, Delete > Rule Set or Delete > Rule, as required.
8.3.2
Placing Pipes on Racks and Planes
This section describes how to set up rules which control:
•
How spacing between Pipes on pipe racks and routing planes is calculated from
Flanges on the Pipes.
•
How the weight of a Pipe can affect Pipe Rack Packing.
•
Shoe Height.
Flanges on Routing Planes
By default, Pipe Router will run pipes along Routing planes with the wall-to-wall Pipe Gap
given on the Pipe Router Defaults window. For more information, refer to Defaults.
If the user needs to run sections of Pipes which include Flanges along routing planes, the
user can specify that the gap value will be applied as a wall-to-flange (WF) gap, if the
flanges can be staggered, or as a flange-to-flange (FF) gap, if the flanges are side-by-side
on the plane. The default is wall-to-wall (WW) spacing. The spacing is controlled by the
PLWW attribute of the RPLA. PLWW can be set to WW, WF or FF.
If WW or WF spacing is specified, the Pipe Router will look for rules of type FLWI and apply
them. The size of flange is found using the Flange Width (FLWI) rule, which is applied to the
default flange (i.e. the flange which is obtained with an AVEVA PDMS SELECT) for each
branch at its current bore, even if there are other flanges on the pipe rack.
•
When wall-to-flange spacing is used, the greater of the flange widths for the current
pipe and the adjacent pipe will be added to the wall-to-wall spacing.
•
When flange-to-flange spacing is used, the flange width of both pipes will be added to
the wall-to-wall gap.
Note:
The flange width taken as 0 if:
•
No flange width rule is applied.
•
Either branch does not have a default flange.
If necessary the user can also specify an additional pipe-specific gap, for example, for
very hot pipes.
Example of Wall-to-Flange Spacing
If a rule is used, so that the flange width is set to 1.5 x bore, then wall-to-flange spacing is
calculated as follows.
The constant gap is set to 50mm. Then the centre of an insulated branch of OD 200mm,
bore 100mm would be placed 435mm from the centre of an adjacent branch of OD 150mm,
bore 140mm.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:69
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Example of Flange-to-Flange Spacing
If the rule sets the flange width to 1.5 x bore, then flange-to-flange spacing is calculated as
follows:
½ OD Pipe A
100
Flange width Pipe A
150
Gap
50
Flange width Pipe B
210
½ OD Pipe B
75
Total
585
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:70
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Packing Methods
There are two packing methods available. Pipe Router will either place a pipe on a plane as
near as possible to the edge of the plane, or pack heavy pipes at the edges of racks and
light ones at the centre. The packing method is an attribute of the Routing Plane. It can be
set for the Travel Plane of pipe-racks and for individual planes.
If the user selects the By Weight method, the PLPM (Plane Packing Method) attribute of the
plane will be set to WEIG, and Pipe Router will look for a weight rule, (PURP set to WEIG),
to determine whether pipes are light or heavy.
The user can use weight rules to determine whether pipes are packed at the top or bottom
of vertical planes
Horizontal Routing Planes
In the weight-related packing method on horizontal planes, for heavy pipes Pipe Router will
search inwards from both edges looking for a free slot with a large enough gap between it
and any adjacent pipe. The heavy pipe will be placed closest to whichever edge a slot is
found. For light pipes Router will first look in the middle of the plane or rack to see if this slot
is free. Router will then search in both directions outwards looking for a free slot and use the
closer to the centre. Pipes for which no rule exists will be treated as light pipes and placed in
the centre of the rack or plane.
Vertical Routing Planes
The weight-related packing method can also be applied to vertical routing planes with a
horizontal travel direction. If the weight-related packing method is used then, for light pipes,
Pipe Router will search downwards from the top edge of the routing plane edges looking for
a free slot with a large enough gap between it and any adjacent pipe. For heavy pipes Pipe
Router will search upwards from the bottom edge of the plane. Pipes for which no rule exists
will be treated as light pipes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:71
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
The user cannot use weight-related packing for a vertical plane with a vertical travel
direction.
Example of Weight-related Packing
If the third and sixth pipes to be packed on a rack are ‘heavy’ and the others are light, the
placement of pipes will be:
Additional Gaps
Sometimes certain pipes need to be placed further than others from their neighbours.
Process pipes might need to be separated more than utility pipes. Extra-hot pipes, or pipes
which will need tracing where the tracing has not been represented by the insulation, should
have wider gaps beside them.
The size of any additional space required can be found using an additional gap rule
(Purpose ADGP) applied to the default bend or elbow of each branch at its current bore.
Example
Assume WF spacing is used, with a rule that the flange-width is 1.5 x bore and that the user
has a constant 50mm gap. Then the centre of an insulated branch of OD 200mm, bore
100mm, extra gap 20mm would be placed 465mm from the centre of an adjacent branch of
OD 150mm, bore 140mm extra gap 10mm.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:72
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Shoe Heights
Branches routed via planes or pipe-racks can be offset by a user-specified distance from the
plane to allow for shoe-heights. The user specifies the shoe-height using rules.
The Rules should have PURPose ‘SHOE’. Rules with purpose ‘SHOE’ do not have a logical
part. Their action is a real expression giving the shoe height.
Note: The Shoe Height is calculated from the bottom of the pipe not the insulation.
The real value (h) returned from a shoe height rule is used to specify the height, above a
rack or plane, of the bottom of the insulation. However, you may wish to specify a shoe
height (H) with respect to the bottom of the pipe itself, which is shown in the following
diagram:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:73
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Using the shoe height rule, you can specify the shoe height as the expression:
h = H - ½ ( Insulation parameter[1])
Example
Rule with shoe height H of 200mm:
Selection:
( ALL BRANCH ALL BRANCH MEMBERS ) WITH (
IPAR[1] ) )
NOT UNSET ( ATTRIB
Action:
( 200mm - 0.5 * ATTRIB IPAR[1] )
Importing Data from P&ID Files
If your P&ID system is configured so that it is capable of outputting data for use in AVEVA
PDMS, you can load your P&ID file into Pipe Router. This section describes which attributes
must be set before the P&ID data can be imported, and also the P&ID file format.
Note: The P&ID file is imported by selecting Create > Add New Pipes From P&ID. The
P&ID Import window is displayed.
Attribute Settings
Make sure that the following branch and component attributes are set.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:74
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Branch Attributes:
Pspec
Ispec
Piping Specification to use
Insulation Specification to use
If the head connects to another branch, set:
Href
Name of the element to which the head connects.
If the head is unconnected (Href is unset), set:
Hbor
The bore of the head.
Hcon
Connection type of the head.
Lhead
TRUE - indicates that Hpos is a valid position.
Hpos
The position of the head.
Hdir
Direction of the head.
If the tail connects to another branch, set:
Tref
The name of the element to which the tail connects.
If a tail is unconnected, set the following attributes:
Tcon
Connection type of the tail.
Tbor
The bore of the tail.
If the tail is unconnected (Tref is unset), then you do not need to set its position. If the
tail’s position is fixed, set:
Ltail
TRUE - indicates that Lpos is a valid position.
Tpos
Position of tail
Tdir
The direction of the tail.
Alternatively, leave both Ltail, Tdir, and Tpos unset. In this case, Pipe Router will calculate
the position based upon the components in the branch, and any component and tube rules
that apply.
Component Attributes
The Spref attribute must be set.
The Neutral Description Language
A neutral description language is used to extract an intermediate ASCII file from your P&ID
system and then used to recreate the P&ID in PDMS for use with Pipe Router.
Before attempting to create a neutral flat file, be aware of the following points:
•
All characters must be in upper case, except for names of elements, which can be
standard PDMS format (/Pipe-1-B2).
•
All comments take up one line and have two hyphens and a space as the first three
characters.
•
You can insert blank lines, if required.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:75
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
You can use the space bar and tab to create space between fields and commands.
When a pipe or branch is created, the first command you must enter is START, which enters
set-up mode. Any elements that you create while you are in set-up mode belong to the
significant element specified in the last START command.
The general format of the file is as follows:
START PIPE /pipe_name...
START BRANCH /branch_name...
...elements...
END
START BRANCH /branch_name...
...elements...
END
END
Where element can be one of the following types:
CAP
INST
REDU
TEE
VALV
VENT
OLET
For example:
-- Here is a simple example of a neutral flat file.
START PIPE /Pipe2 PSPEC /DDD BORE 200 ISPEC /A1D
START BRANCH /branch-1 HREF /PUMP1/N1 TREF /VESS1/NOZZ2
BORE 150
TEE
/TEE3 80
VALV /VALVE2 GLOBE
END
END
Before performing an import, the user must create the equipment that is required, which
enables the pipes to set the HREF and TREF on the nozzles of the equipment. It is
assumed that the nozzle names are the same in both the P&ID and PDMS.
Each file must contain one or more pipes. Each pipe must have one or more branches. It is
up to the P&ID system to decide what is a branch and what is a pipe. The following figure
shows a simple P&ID.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:76
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
The diagram could be represented as:
•
PipeA, PipeB, PipeC and PipeD
or
•
Pipe1/B1 (A), Pipe 1/B2 (B), Pipe1/B3 (C) and Pipe1/B4 (D).
Command Syntax for P&ID Neutral Flat Files
Anything in lower case is one of the following:
value
Positive or negative real number
integer
Positive integer
logical
TRUE or FALSE
nl
New line
PIPE
>-START PIPE /pipe_name -+------------------.
|
|
‘-PSPEC pipe_spec -+-------------.
|
|
‘- BORE value +--cont
continued >--+- ISPEC -- insulation_spec .
|
|
|- TSPEC -- tracing_spec ----|
|
|
|- PSPEC -- pipe_spec -------|
|
|
|- INSU -- value ------------|
|
|
|- PRES -- value ------------|
|
|
|- attribute -- value -------|
.--------.
|
|
/
|
‘----------------------------+- nl -*- branch -+- END ->
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:77
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
where
branch
is the syntax to define a branch,
see below
attribute
is any Pipe attribute
INSU value
is the thickness of the insulation.
BRANCH
>-- START BRANCH /branch_name HREF /name ---> continued
continued ---+-----------------------------.
|
|
|- BORE integer --------------|
|
|
|- PSPEC pipe_spec -----------|
|
|
|- ISPEC insulation_spec -----|
|
|
|- TSPEC tracing_spec --------|
|
|
|- INSU insulation thickness -|
|
|
|- PRES -- value -------------|
|
|
|- attribute -- value --------|
|
|
|- TREF /name ----------------’
|
|
| .-------<-------.
|/
|
*---- element ----'
|
‘---------------- nl -- END ->
where element is any of the following:
CAP
/pipe_name/cap_name
stype
REDU
/pipe_name/reducer_name
stype
value
TEE
/pipe_name/tee_name
stype
value
VALV
/pipe_name/valve_name
stype
VENT
/pipe_name/vent_name
stype
INST
/pipe_name/inst_name
stype
OLET
/pipe_name/olet_name
stype
Note
•
The STYPE set for each element can be omitted if a default STYP is set in the
specification. For example, a Tee could be specified by either:
TEE
/tee-1
T-Type
TEE
/tee-1
200
200
or
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:78
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
if the default STYP is set to T-Type. It is recommended that specifications are set up with
default STYPs so if the STYP is missing in the flat file a valid component will still be
selected and Pipe Router can route it.
In each case, element can optionally be followed by options from one or both of the
following:
>----+--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
‘---
PBOre integer ---------.
|
ANgle -----------------|
|
RAdius ----------------|
|
ABOre -----------------|
|
ISPEC insulation_spec -|
|
TSPEC tracing_spec ----|
|
LBOre -----------------|
|
PREssure --------------|
|
TEMperature -----------|
|
RATing ----------------+--- uval -->
>----+--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
|--|
‘---
STYpe -----------------.
|
TYpe ------------------|
|
ACOnn -----------------|
|
LCOnn -----------------|
|
PCOnn integer ---------+--- word --.
|
word ------------------+-- value --|
|
|
‘-- word ---+--->
•
value is the new bore of the pipe for a Reducer (or enlarger), and the P3 bore for a Tee.
Any change in bore along a branch can be specified by the BORE keyword. For
example:
START PIPE /P-1 BORE 200
START BRANCH /B-1 BORE 100
REDU /R-1 BORE 50
END
END
•
The bores at P1, P2 and P3 can be set individually. For example:
TEE /T-1 PBORE1 100 PBORE2 50 PBORE3 50
•
If a component is at a different bore to the rest of the pipe, for example, a reducing
valve, its PBORE0 can be set. PDMS Router will insert a reducer automatically when
routing the pipe. An example of this syntax is:
BRANCH /B-1 HREF /NOZZ-1 BORE 100
VALV /V-1 GATE PBORE0 50
END
If the PBORE0 is set on a REDU along with the BORE, it will be ignored.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:79
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
•
The tracing and insulation specifications can be set with the syntax:
element
•
TSPEC /tspec-1
ISPEC /ispec-1
Elements that appear in more than one branch will only be created once. For example:
Valve /V-1 is included in branch /B-1 and /B-2. Branch /B-1 has its TREF set to /V-1 so
the valve will not appear in /B-1. It is assumed /V-1 is an inline component for /B-2.
Example of a Neutral Flat File
Below is an example of a typical neutral flat file. Different style layouts are shown for each
pipe.
-- File to test import from P&ID to PDMS Design
—- Pipes from Sheet X
START PIPE /PIPE1 PSPEC /A3B BORE 300 ISPEC /XXX INSU 100
START BRANCH /first_branch HREF VESSEL1/NOZZ1/ TREF PUMP1/NOZZ1
VALV /VALVE1 GATE
REDU /REDU1 200
TEE /TEE
200
TEE /Tee-2 PBORE3 200
VALV /VALVE2 GLOBE
CAP /CAP1
OPEN
END
START BRANCH /second_branch HREF VESSEL1/NOZZ2 TSPEC /t-spec
VALV /GATE_VALVE GATE
REDU /REDU2 CONC 200 ISPEC /I-spec TSPEC /T-spec
END
END
START PIPE /PIPE2 PSPE /A1D BORE 200 ISPEC /DDD INSU 50
START BRANCH /branch-1 HREF /NOZZ3 TREF PUMP1/NOZZ3 BORE 150
TEE /Tee3 TEE-TYPE PBORE3 50
END
START BRANCH /branch-2 HREF VESSEL1/NOZZ4 TREF PUMP1/NOZZ4
VALV /Valve-safety1 GLOBE
REDU /R-1-1 BORE 100
END
END
8.3.3
Command Syntax
The syntax used in Pipe Router is to allow customers to build Router into their own systems,
especially batch input, and to adapt the standard Applicationware. For most users, this
should not be necessary as all important functionality is available via Applicationware.
These commands can only be used in ROUTER mode. To switch from standard DESIGN to
Router, give the command:
ROUTER
The following errors will result if Router is not available.
(61,701)
Cannot open router DSO due to:- <TEXT>
(71,702)
Incorrect Router Library version. It is <INT> but should be <INT>
(61,791)
No licences available for Piperouter
(61,792)
Piperouter security error <INT>
(61,792)
Piperouter security error
To return to DESIGN, give the command:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:80
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
EXIT
Note on element identifiers
Use names as element identifiers.
•
If a reference is output and then re-input, it can result in an invalid reference.
•
Avoid referring to Elbows using “ELBO n of /B1”: Pipe Router re-creates Elbows every
time a Branch is re-routed, and the numbering can easily get changed.
Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs
The commands described in this chapter are presented in the form of syntax graphs.
•
Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, where
the capital letters indicate the minimum abbreviation.
Note: The convention does not mean that the second part of the command must be typed
in lowercase letters; commands may be entered in any combination of uppercase
and lowercase letters.
•
For example, the command ICONSTraint can be input in any of the following forms:
ICONST
ICONSTR
ICONSTRA
ICONSTRAI
ICONSTRAIN
ICONSTRAINT
•
Commands shown in all uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated.
•
Command arguments are shown in lowercase letters. These are just descriptions of
what you need to enter. For example:
CLEAR n
•
means that to remove the constraint number 3, enter:
CLEAR 3
•
Syntax graphs are read from top left to bottom right. The start point is shown by >, and
you can follow any path through the graph until the exit point, shown by >, is reached.
•
Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input any
one of the commands to the right of the junction. For example:
>----+--- ABC -----.
|
|
|--- PQR -----|
|
|
‘-------------+--->
•
means you can type in ABC or PQR or just press Enter to get the default option.
•
Text in angle brackets <. . . > is the name of another syntax graph. The convention is
used for syntax which occurs in many places. The graphs referred to are described at
the end of this section. For example:
>----+--- ABC -----.
|
|
|--- PQR -----|
|
|
|--- <dia> ---|
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:81
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
|
|
‘-------------+--->
•
means you can type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given in
diagram <dia> or just press Enter to get the default option.
•
Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop back junctions. Command options
following these may be repeated as required. For example:
.-----<-------.
/
|
>---*--- option1 ---|
|
|
|--- option2 ---|
|
|
‘--- option3 ---+--->
•
means that you can enter any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3,
where the options can be commands, other syntax diagrams, or command arguments.
•
The simplified format:
.----<------.
/
|
>---*--- name ----+--->
•
means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space.
Standard Syntax Graphs
Some graphs contain references to other, standard syntax graphs which are widely used
throughout AVEVA DESIGN. References to standard syntax graphs are shown in angle
brackets:
<example>
For more information, refer to the DESIGN Reference Manual.
Ordering and Routing Branches
Ordering is required when routing a number of branches so that the main branches are
routed first before sub-branches such as drains and vents, which requires two commands:
ORDER---<SELATT>-+--<SELATT>---.
|
|
‘-------------+-->
and then
VAR <VARNAME>
ROUTE ORDer
Can give the following error
(61,723) Could not order <REF> for routing
The ORDER command returns a collection of branch references sorted so that the main
branches are first.
A network of branches for a given branch can also be found with the command:
VAR <VARNAME>
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
ROUTE
NETwork name
8:82
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
And then to route the branches:
ROUTE --- <SELATT>-+--<SELATT>---.
|
|
‘-------------+-->
If no branches or pipes are in the selection you get the following error:
(2,563) Wrong element type
Branch Constraints
A route can be constrained to pass through points, along planes or to use pipe racks with
the following syntax. The current element must be a Branch.
Points
NEW POINT -+- AT <DOPE>-+-DIRection <DOPE>-+-LEAVedir <DOPE>-+-AFTER name -.
|
|
|
|
|
‘- name -----+------------------+-----------------+-------------+-->
Creates a point in space with optional arrive and leave directions after either the head of the
bran or one of its members.
Planes and Racks
NEW PLANE
name AFTER name --+-- LAST name ---.
|
|
‘----------------+-->
A plane should be defined by referencing a RPLA. When using a RPLA, the direction of
travel is fixed as the X direction for single planes and travel planes and Y direction for entry
and exit planes.
For a rack the first name should be an RPLG which owns at least one RPLA with PURP
PREX (that is, an entry/exit plane) and at least one RPLA with PURP not set to PREX (the
travel plane).
To remove a constraint use:
CLEAR -+---- n ----.
|
|
‘---ALL ----+-->
To move one constraint after another in the branch list.
REORDer -- n ---+--AFTER---.
|
|
‘--BEFORE--+--<INT> ->
To move a constraint to after a different component in the branch list.
EDIT -- n ---+--AFTER--- name ->
To query constraints:
Q ICONSTraint NUMBer
will return the number of point and plane constraints for a branch.
Q ICONSTraint TYPE <INT>
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:83
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
will return the type for a given constraint.
Q ICONSTraint POINt <INT>-+--POSition ---------------------------.
|
|
|--DIRection --------------------------|
|
|
|--LEAVdirection ----------------------|
|
|
|--COMPonent --------------------------|
|
|
|--RELAtion ---------------------------|
|
|
|--ACTUal-+--POSition------.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--DIRection-----|
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--LEAVdirection-+-WRT name -|
|
|
|
|
‘--------------------------------------+->
To allow the component parts of a point constraint to be queried. As the position and
directions can be stored as expressions, the ACTUAL command returns the calculated
values.
Note: RELATION and FIXED need not be queried as they are always respectively AFTER
and FIXED.
If a DATUm is used as a point constraint, its position can be found by exiting from Router
and querying its attributes in the normal manner.
Q ICONSTraint PLANe
n ---+-- STARt --------------------------------.
|
|
|-- FINIsh -------------------------------|
|
|
|-- DIRection ----------------------------|
|
|
|-- COMPonent ----------------------------|
|
|
|-- LAStconent ---------------------------|
|
|
|-- RELAtion -----------------------------|
|
|
|-- RPLAne -------------------------------|
|
|
|-- ACTUal -+--STARt ---.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|--FINIsh --+-- WRT name -.
|
|
|
|
|
|
‘--DIRection -------------+---|
|
|
|-- ACTUal -------------------------------|
|
|
|-- FIXed --------------------------------|
|
|
‘-----------------------------------------+-->
Since a plane is defined using a RPLA, its dimensions are found by exiting from Router and
querying its attributes in the normal manner.
Configuration
Allows the behaviour of Router to be modified. It has the following syntax:
CONFiguration -+-- ERROR <WORD> ------|
|
|
|-- DIRection <WORD> --|
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:84
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
|
|-|
|-|
|-|
|-|
‘--
|
PRSP <REAL> -------|
|
PRRO <REAL> -------|
|
ORDER <WORD> ------|
|
MODE <WORD> -------|
|
ITERation-- n -----+-->
ERROR can be set to MESS, in which case extra diagnostic messages are output during
routing.
DIRECTION can be set to BEND, ELBO or RULE and allows the change of direction
elements to be specified.
PRSP is the basic gap for pipe-rack spacing.
PRRO is the gap rounding value for pipe-rack spacing.
ORDER, MODE and ITERATION are not currently used in core PDMS Router, but can be
used for the appware.
To query configuration setting, use:
Q CONFiguration -+-- ERROR -------.
|
|
|-- DIRection ---|
|
|
|-- PRSP --------|
|
|
|-- PRRO --------|
|
|
|-- ORDER -------|
|
|
|-- MODE --------|
|
|
|-- ITERation ---|
|
|
‘----------------+-->
General Rule Setting
The following syntax is for setting the SELECTION, LOGICAL and ACTION attributes of
GRULES. The current element must be a GRULE.
GENEral RULEs SELEction <SELATT>
GENEral RULEs LOGIcal <EXPZL>
GENEral RULEs ACTIon <EXPRG>
GENEral RULEs ACTIon
UNSET
To query the attributes set:
Q GENEral RULEs SELEction
Q GENEral RULEs LOGIcal
Q GENEral RULEs ACTIon
Rules can be used for routing in two ways. They can be SET, which means that a selection
of GRULEs are set and then used in subsequent routing during the design session.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:85
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Alternatively, rules can be STORED, which means that the same GRULES will be used in
future routing, thus maintaining design intent. To specify which:
GENEral RULEs USE --+--SET-----.
|
|
‘--STOREd--+-->
To SET rules:
GENEral RULEs SET -+-HIGH-.
|
|
|-LOW--|
|
|
‘------+-APPEnd------.
|
|
|-OVERWrite---|
|
|
‘-------------+-<SELATT>-+-<SELATT>-.
|
|
|
‘----------+----------+->
The defaults are LOW priority and OVERWRITE.
Rules can then be UNSET with the following syntax.
GENEral RULEs UNSET --<SELATT>--+--<SELATT>---.
|
|
‘-------------+-->
To query the set rules, the following syntax will return an array of GRULE references and
their priority.
VAR <VARNAME> GRULEs SET
To STORE rules, the current element must be either a Bran, Pipe, Zone or Site. The stored
rules will then apply to branches owned by that element. However, when determining which
rules to use, the program navigates up until it finds some rules to apply. Thus, if rules have
been saved for Zone and Site say, then only the Zone rules will be used.
GENEral RULEs SAVE -+-HIGH-.
|
|
|-LOW--|
|
|
|------+-<SELATT>-+-OVERWrite --.
|
|
|
|
|--APPEnd ----|
|
|
|
|
‘-------------|
|
|
‘-- SET ------------------------+-->
The defaults are LOW priority and OVERWRITE.
To query the rules saved:
Q GENEral RULEs SAVED
To remove the saved rules for a particular element:
GENEral RULEs UNSAVE
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:86
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
Rule Testing
As writing rules is not always straightforward, the following functionality is provided to
provide feedback.
To test a branch member to see what rules apply to it and whether it passes them:
VAR <VARNAME> GRULEs TEST --+--<WORD>---.
|
|
‘-----------+-->
The word is the type of rule to be tested, MAJO, MINO etc, and if not specified, all rules are
tested.
To test plane rules the current element needs to be the branch to be tested.
VAR <VARNAME> GRULEs PLANE name
where the GID is the RPLG to be tested. The returned results are the travel, entry and exit
planes.
A branch member can also be tested by applying the action part of a rule to it with:
GENEral RULEs APPLY WORD
The word is the type of rule to be tested, MAJO, MINO etc. Note if the element passes the
rule already, then no action is carried out.
Router Banner
Pipe Router has its own banner which can be queried (in Router mode) with the command:
Q BANNer
8.3.4
Special Router Attributes
There are a number of special attributes used by Pipe Router. These are described below.
RLOC
Attribute of branch members. Determines whether element is to be deleted or repositioned
by Router.
RLOC = -1
Unset
RLOC = 0
Non-deletable and positionable.
RLOC = 1
Locked
RLOC = 2
Deletable
HREL
Attribute of branch members. Logical. Determines if component should be placed as near to
Head as possible (TRUE) or as close to Tail as possible (FALSE). If a component is tailrelative it will force all components between it and the next locked component or constraint
towards the Tail. The default is TRUE.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:87
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
BRLO
Attribute of branch set and used by Pipe Router. Users should not normally set BRLO. If you
are routing a branch which has already been positioned, it is better to unset BRLO and then
set LHEAD and LTAIL as appropriate. Indicates whether the head and /or tail of branch is
fixed or free. If the head / tail is connected to a nozzle or a piping component the value of
BRLO is ignored.
If the HREF is unset then the head must be positioned (LHEAD true) and the head of the
branch is fixed. Thus the head lock is only relevant when the head is connected to the tail of
another branch. If the head is fixed the tail of the connected branch will be positioned where
the head of this branch is, but if the head is not fixed the head of this branch will be
positioned at the tail of the connected branch.
If TREF is unset the tail can be positioned and the tail of the branch fixed; or the tail can be
free -when Router will calculate a position for it. When the tail is connected to the head of
another branch it will be positioned where the head of that branch is unless the tail is fixed.
Note: Pipe Router does not consider the possibility of branches connected head-to-head or
tail-to-tail).
BRLO = 0
unset; Router will use LHEAD / LTAIL to calculate BRLO if necessary
BRLO = 4
free head and free tail
BRLO = 5
fixed head and free tail
BRLO = 6
free head and fixed tail
BRLO = 7
fixed head and fixed tail
If BRLO is not set before calling Router, then HREF, LHEAD, TREF and LTAIL attributes are
used to set to a suitable value.
BRSTATUS
The setting of the BRSTATUS (Branch Status) attribute shows the routed status of the
Branch. These values can be used in Autocolour rules so that Branches can be displayed in
different colours according to whether they have been routed successfully or not. The
values are as follows:
0
Not Routed
1
Routed successfully
2
All routes clash - Using default
3
Clash using route
4
Route breaks rule
5
Routed ignoring invalid constraint list
6
Cannot find required component - Datacon will fail
7
System error - Unable to route branch
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:88
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
8
Serious data error - Unable to route branch
9
Error whilst routing branch
10
Route violates minimum tube length
PLPP
Attribute of RPLA. Shows where on a plane to place branches.
PLPP = ABOV
place above the plane
PLPP = BELO
place below the plane
PLPP = CENT
place at the centre of the plane
The default is CENT.
PURP - (RPLA)
For pipe racks, indicates which are entry/exit planes.
PURP = PREX - Entry/exit plane
If not set to PREX, then it is assumed to be a travel plane.
PURP - (GRUL)
The PURP attribute of a GRULE indicates the type of rule.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:89
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Router
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
8:90
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Penetration
9
Pipe Penetration
On a typical project, it is necessary for designers to create holes in panel elements, for
example: deck plates, gratings, floors, etc. Due to implications on design integrity and cost,
the hole creation process needs to be controlled and managed.
The Piping Designer would not be able to create holes in floor plates or wall panels as these
items would have been created by another design discipline (Structural Department). These
design items would be held in another database for which the Piping Designer would only
have read access.
A method of requesting, approving or rejecting a hole between disciplines is required; this is
known as Hole Management.
The Piping Designer locates and sizes the hole and then makes a request for the hole to be
created by the other discipline.
9.1
Hole Management
Hole Management is controlled and managed using the Hole Management application
which allows for communication of hole data between disciplines including Request and
Approval processes. Making sure holes are only created by users with appropriate write
access per missions. Performing validation checks on managed holes and providing
feedback to users on the hole status and the generation of reports for managed holes.
Generally in a project discipline Designers do not write access to items created by other
disciplines, for example: a Piping designer does not have write access to Structural
designers do not have write access to piping elements.
With hole management penetration holes are specified and requested by the penetrating
discipline normally piping, HVAC or equipment designers and approved by the penetrated
discipline, normally structural designers.
The specification of a penetration hole by the relevant discipline in the appropriate design
application creates a virtual hole in the panel element, consisting of a FRMW and two
FIXING elements. Each fixing element has a Specification Reference (Spref) attributes that
points to the hole definition in the catalogue. An Association (ASSOC) element that
references all the hole elements is also created.
Once the virtual hole has been created the penetrating discipline enters the Hole
Management application and requests the hole. The owner of the panel, normally the
Structural discipline, then reviews and approves (or rejects) the hole using the mechanism
provided by the Hole Management application.
The act of approving the request creates the actual hole as a PFIT owned by the PANE
element. The Hole Management application checks and validates the hole using the
association restrictions and stores data on the hole history and status. Only valid holes may
be approved. For a Structural penetration the structural designer may be both the requester
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
9:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Penetration
and approved, although specific company procedures, controlled by DAC may be required if
the Originator and Reviewer need to be different. For more information on Hole
Management, refer to Design Common Functionality User Guide.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
9:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Check and Output Design Data
10
Check and Output Design Data
On a typical project, it is necessary for pipework designers to check for errors and
inconsistencies in the pipework layout, checking for clashes (spatial interferences) between
design elements. Once these have been resolved the designer will need to output a design
data report derived from the piping model and generate an isometric plot.
These facilities are available from all DESIGN applications, so the designer can readily
check and output data from any combination of DESIGN disciplines.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
10:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Check and Output Design Data
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
10:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
11
Modify Pipework
Once the pipework design has been completed it may be necessary to modify and orientate
the pipes, branches or components.
The user can also modify head and tail details, connections, specifications and if required
disconnect.
The functionality to modify head and tail details, connections, specifications is identical to
that described in Branch Element, refer to Branch Element for more information.
11.1
Disconnect Pipe From Element
As the functionality for the disconnection of the branch head or tail from an element is
identical, for the purposes of this user guide, only the head disconnection is described.
To disconnect a branch head from an element, the user must select the pipe or branch
element in the design explorer, then select Show pipe modification form from the
Pipework Toolbar.
The Modify Pipe window is displayed, click Set Pipe, to identify the element as the CE. The
attributes of the element are automatically populated in the Modify Pipe window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
From the Head Connection: pane of the Modify Pipe window, click Change, the Modify
Pipe window is automatically updated to display the Head Connection details.
Click Disconnect to disconnect the branch head from the element it is connected to or click
Back to discard any inputs
11.2
Reconnect Pipe to Element
As the functionality for the reconnect of the branch head or tail to an equipment element is
identical, for the purposes of this user guide, only the head reconnect is described.
To reconnect a branch head to an equipment element, the user must select the pipe or
branch equipment element (that has been moved from its position) in the design explorer.
Then select Show pipe modification form from the Pipework Toolbar.
The Modify Pipe window is displayed, click Set Pipe, to identify the equipment element as
the CE. The attributes of the equipment element are automatically populated in the Modify
Pipe window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
From the Head Connection: pane of the Modify Pipe window, click Change, the Modify
Pipe window is automatically updated to display the Head Connection details.
Click Reconnect to reconnect the branch head from the equipment element it is connected
to or click Back to discard any inputs.
11.3
Modify Basic Pipe Process Data
The basic pipe process data pane of the Modify Pipe window is used to modify the basic
pipe data of a pipe element. From the Branch pane of the Modify Pipe window which is
automatically displayed once the pipe is created, click Change Detail. The Modify Pipe is
populated with the basic pipe data of the pipe element identified as the CE.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The functionality available from the Modify Pipe window, is identical to that available from
the Create Pipe window. Refer to Create Pipe for more information.
11.4
Modify Branch Data
The basic pipe process data pane of the Modify Pipe window is used to modify the basic
pipe data of a branch element. From the Spec pane of the Modify Pipe window which is
automatically displayed once the pipe is created, click Change Detail. The Modify Pipe is
populated with the basic pipe data of the branch element identified as the CE.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The functionality available from the Modify Pipe window, is identical to that available from
the Create Pipe window. Refer to Create Pipe for more information.
11.5
Pipe Modification
The Pipe Modification option provides facilities for the user to modify the bore or
specifications of a selected pipe or branch. In addition to these modifications, this also
allows the setting of insulation and tracing specifications.
11.5.1
Pipe Specification Modification
Using the Pipework Application main menu bar, select Modify > Pipe > Specification.
The Default Specification window is displayed. For more information on Default
Specification, refer to Default Pipe Specification.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
11.5.2
Pipe Component Bore and Specification
Using the Pipework Application main menu bar, select Modify > Pipe > Component
Bore/Specification. The Modify Components window is displayed.
The Modify Component window is a multi function window allowing the user view and
modify the components and attributes of the currently selected branch or pipe. The same
window is displayed for currently selected the pipe or branch.
The user can select another branch in the design hierarchy, then click Current Element to
populate the Modify Component window with its attributes.
To highlight selected components within the pipe or branch, the user can click to highlight
the components in the 3D graphical view, then click Select from graphics. The selected
components are highlighted in the Modify Components window.
The Insulation Specification can be added to the Modify Component window, click to
check the Insulation Spec check box, the insulation specification is displayed in a separate
column in the Modify Component window.
The Tracing Specification can be added to the Modify Component window, click to check
the Tracing Spec check box, the tracing specification is displayed in a separate column in
the Modify Component window.
The Component List tab on the Modify Component window displays the following:
Design Element
Displays the name of the element
Component Description
Displays the description of the component
ABORE
Displays the bore at the p-point where the flow enters
the component
LBORE
Displays the bore at the p-point where the flow leaves
the component
PBORE
Displays the bore at any of the p-points regardless of
the flow direction
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Spec Component
Displays the current specification of the component
New Spec Component
Displays the new specification of the component
New Component
Description
Displays the description of the new component
Apply changes to like components check box - checking applies one component change
to all like instances in the Component List.
11.5.3
Error Messages
With the Error Messages tab selected, the Modify Components window lists the
component selected for modification which produce an error in the selection process. When
the selection process takes place, each selected item is scanned to find an equivalent in the
new specification. Where an item cannot be found, an error is indicated with a description in
the error list.
11.5.4
Highlighting
With the highlighting tab selected, the user can define the colour's used in the component
list when selecting components from the list. Once a highlighting colour scheme has been
defined this is restored upon re-entry into the application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The Highlighting tab on the Modify Components window, displays:
Component:
Defines the colour of the selected component in the list.
Tube:
Defines the colour of the selected tube in the list.
No Specification:
Defines the colour of the selected component in the list,
when there is no specification.
Successfully Selected New
Specification:
Defines the colour of the selected component in the list,
when a new specification has been found.
Failed to Select
Specification:
Defines the colour of the selected component in the list,
when a new specification can be found.
New
Reset to Defaults
Apply changes
components
Returns the highlight colours to the default setting.
to
like
Apply the changes to similar components in the list,
without the need to select them.
To change any of the highlighted colours, click the colour to be changed to display a colour
selection window.
Note: The name of this window will change depending on which of the colours is selected
on the Modify Components window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Note: The colour on the Modify Components window changes to match the selection.
Select the required highlighting colour, and once set the button will change to that colour
and the highlighting will be changed in the component list.
Specific highlighting can also be turned On and Off using the radio buttons next to each
highlighting colour buttons.
Note: The highlighting defaults are loaded if no highlighting scheme can be retrieved upon
entering the Pipework application.
11.5.5
Modification Options
To display the Modification drop-down list, right click over a highlighted line(s) in the
Modify Component window.
Modify Specification
To modify the specification of selected components in the Modify Components window,
click Modify Specification from the pop-up menu. The Select Piping Spec window is
displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Note: Normally any items which are not in the same spec as the current branch are ignored
by this process, which allows for items such as pipe supports and special
components to remain untouched.
From the Specification drop-down list, select a new specification, click to select the Apply
changes to out of spec check box, this forces the selection process to look at all
components regardless of their original specification.
Click Apply to start the search process to find equivalent components in the selected
specification and close the Select Piping Spec window. The Component List is refreshed
to show the new components.
At this point only suggestions of what the new components will be and it does not make any
changes to the design.
Any items which could not be found in the new specification are listed as having ‘No
selection available’ and will not be changed if the other changes are applied.
A selection summary panel is displayed at the bottom of the form to show the results of the
specification selection process.
In the component list the components that are selected will be highlighted appropriately. The
components with a selection available and with no selection available will be highlighted
using the colour scheme which is defined in the highlighting tab, described in Choose a
Component.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
If the results are satisfactory, click Apply, to accept the changes. Select the Error
Messages tab to display a list showing any anomalies and these can the be corrected by
inserting or deleting reducers. For more information, refer to
Click Undo to discard any changes and return the attributes to the default, or Dismiss to
close the Component Changes window.
Modify Bore
To modify the bore of selected components in the Modify Components window, click
Modify Bore from the pop-up menu. The Select Bore window is displayed:
From the Bore: drop-down list, select a new bore, click Apply to start the search process to
find equivalent components in the selected specification and close the Select Bore window.
The Component List is refreshed to show the new components.
At this point only suggestions of what the new components will be and it does not make any
changes to the design.
Any items which could not be found in the new specification are listed as having ‘No
selection available’ and will not be changed if the other changes are applied.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
A selection summary panel is displayed at the bottom of the form to show the results of the
specification selection process.
In the component list the components that are selected will be highlighted appropriately. The
components with a selection available and with no selection available will be highlighted
using the colour scheme which is defined in the highlighting tab, described in Choose a
Component.
Modify Insulation Specification
To modify the insulation specification of selected components in the Modify Components
window, click Modify Insulation Spec from the pop-up menu. The Select Insulation Spec
window is displayed:
From the Insulation spec: drop-down list, click Apply to start the search process to find
equivalent components in the selected specification and close the Select Insulation Spec
window. The Component List is refreshed to show the new components.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Modify Tracing Specification
To modify the tracing specification of selected components in the Modify Components
window, click Modify Tracing Spec from the pop-up menu. The Select Tracing Spec
window is displayed:
From the Tracing Spec: drop-down list, click Apply to start the search process to find
equivalent components in the selected specification and close the Select Tracing Spec
window. The Component List is refreshed to show the new components.
11.5.6
Choose a Component
For components where no selection is available, the user can opt to choose the component
by right-clicking over the component in the list displayed in the Modify Component window
and selecting Choose component. The CHOOSE OPTION window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The Specs tab is selected first to set the new specification. The Components tab is then
selected so that an equivalent item can be chosen from a scrollable list of suitable
components.
Click OK adds the selected equivalent component to the Component List on the Modify
Components window. Once the selection is complete, click Apply changes the
components for ones complying with the new specification.
If the changes are unacceptable, click Undo reverts back to the original design.
If the above process results in some items having no selection available, the user can opt to
choose the component using the same method as in Pipe Component Bore and
Specification.
11.5.7
Multiple Component Changes
The user may wish to apply one component change to all like instances in the list where no
alternate selection is available.
Select to check the Apply changes to like components check box. With this option
applied component changes will automatically be applied to all elements in the list that have
the same type as the one being changed via the above process.
Select All
The user can select this option to select all the components in the Modify Components
window.
Clear New Specifications
The user can select this option to remove one or all new specifications added to the Modify
Components window.
11.6
Branch
The Branch option provides facilities for the user to modify some branch attributes.
Position Branch at an Explicit Position
To position a branch in an explicit position, from the main menu bar, select Modify > Branch
> Branch at Explicit Position, the Branch at Explicit Position window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The user can explicitly position the currently selected branch using the generic positioning
options.
Modify Branch Specification
To modify the specification of the branch, from the main menu bar, select Modify > Branch
> Specification, the Modify Branch Specification window is displayed:
The user can modify the specification of the currently selected branch, for more information
on these options, refer to Default Pipe Specification.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Reselect Branch
Once the user has modified any of the branch attributes using the Branch at Explicit
Position window, all of the components within the branch must be reselected so that they
are compatible with the modified attributes.
To reselect a branch, from the main menu bar, select the branch in the design hierarchy,
then select Modify > Branch > Reselect, the Reselect Branch window is displayed:
Click CE to select the branch.
Click Apply, all of the components within the branch are automatically reselected so that
they are compatible with the modified attributes, Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss
to close the Reselect Branch window.
11.7
Component
The Component option provides facilities for the user to modify some component attributes.
General
To modify the attributes of the currently selected component, from the main menu bar, then
select Modify > Component > General, the Piping Components window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
A dual purpose window which allows the user to create, modify and manipulate piping
components.
Although a specification was selected earlier the user can select a different specification for
the piping component, the user can select an alternative specification from the
Specifications: part of the Piping Components window.
Select an insulation specification from the Insulation drop-down list, select the checkbox
along to lock the insulation specification.
Select an tracing specification from the Tracing drop-down list, select the checkbox along to
lock the Tracing specification.
To set the direction of flow, select Forwards (Head to Tail) or Backwards (Tail to Head).
Using the Default checkbox:
•
Select the check box to apply the default selection type automatically for each
component.
•
Click to clear the checkbox to not apply the default specification, a choice of
components are displayed.
Using the Auto Conn checkbox:
•
Select the checkbox to position, orientate and connect the component to the preceding
one automatically.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
•
Click to clear the checkbox to position, orientate and connect the component explicitly.
From the drop-down list, the user can choose one of the options to set the position for the
components p-leave.
Click Ori to return the p-leave to the default direction.
Click Flip to exchange the component’s P2 and P1 (for example: P2 becomes p-arrive and
P1 becomes p-leave).
The user can specify from a selection of options to rotate the component clockwise about it
s axis.
In the drop-down list, the user must choose from a list of available options to position the CE
relative to or to a point identified by the cursor. All of the available options are generic
throughout PDMS.
In the drop-down list:
•
Select Spool - input an offset distance between opposing faces.
•
Select Distance - input an offset distance between component origins
Arrive/Leave
It may be necessary to change the arrive and leave direction of the select component. To
modify the attributes of the multiway component, from the main menu bar, then select
Modify > Component > Arrive/Leave the Mod Comp Arrive/Leave window is displayed:
By default, the default arrive and leave directions are displayed but the user can select an
alternative arrive or leave point from the drop-down lists.
Click Apply to change the arrive or leave direction, or Dismiss to close the Mod Comp
Arrive/Leave window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Route
It may be necessary to change how branches are routed through a three way component.
To modify the attributes of the currently selected component, from the main menu bar, then
select Modify > Component > Route, the Modify Route window is displayed:
To change the route of the three way component, select:
•
Route Through - Routes the branch through the tee (P1 to P2).
•
Branch Off - Routes the branch through P1 and out P3.
•
Split Route - Routes the branch through P3 and out P2.
Click Apply to change the route, Reset to remove all changes or Dismiss to close the
Modify Route window.
Leave Tube
By default, the leave tube from a component has the same specification as the component
itself, and this specification is copied in turn to the next component. To change the leave
tube specification for a component. Select Modify > Component > Leave Tube, the Modify
Leave Tube window is displayed:
Although a specification was selected earlier the user can select a different Specification for
the leave tube of the currently selected element. The default specification will initially be
selected but the user can select an alternative Specification from the drop-down list.
Click Apply to change the Specification, Reset to remove all changes or Dismiss to close
the Modify Leave Tube window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Connection Ref
When a multiway component is connected within a branch to another item (such as a
nozzle, or the head or tail of another branch), the Connection Reference (CREF) attribute of
the component identifies the connected item. To disconnect the component, or connect it to
a different item. Select Modify > Component > Connection Ref, the Connection
Reference window is displayed:
The current connection is displayed in the Connection Reference window, click Unset to
disconnect the current connection.
Click Apply to accept the change, Reset to remove all changes or Dismiss to close the
Connection Reference window.
Note: Modification of the Connection Reference does not change the position or orientation
of any components.
Detail Plotfile
To view an isometric plot of the branch containing the component to be modified, from the
main menu bar, then select Modify > Component > Detail Plotfile, the Detail Plotfile
window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
From more information, refer to Preview Isometrics.
11.8
Slope
On a typical project, pipes are routed horizontally and vertically, but it may be necessary for
designers to include pipes which slope at angles between components (falling pipes).
PDMS allows the user to set the leave direction of a component to achieve a given slope in
the pipe connecting it to the next component, which is valid only for a branch element and a
component whose geometry involves a change of direction and have a variable angle, such
as an elbow.
Functionality is now available which allows the user to apply slope to any existing pipes
including all the branches and components within it.
Branch Slope
displays the AutoSlope window
Pipe Slope
displays the Slope Pipe window
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:21
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
11.8.1
Branch Slope
To achieve a slope, select the required branch in the design hierarchy, then from the main
menu bar, select Modify > Branch Slope, the AutoSlope window is displayed:
The user can set the leave direction of the pipe as a rate of fall or as an angle, click Fall or
Angle radio buttons. Input the required rate of fall or angle.
Note: When one value is input, the other is calculated automatically.
Click Apply to re orientate the component. The Confirm message is displayed:
Click Yes to slope the head Up or No to slope the head Down.
The user is required to set the slope for each component in the branch, so depending on
how many components are in the branch, the Confirm message window is displayed.
Irrespective of the choice taken on the direction of the component, the Confirm message for
the tail is displayed:
Click Yes to change the position of the Tail at the leave of the last member.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:22
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Click No to leave the Tail in the same position, but change the orientation to suit the sloping
pipe.
Click Cancel to discard any inputs and close the AutoSlope window.
11.8.2
Slope Pipe
Throughout the design process it may be necessary to apply a slope to any existing pipe,
and all of the branches within it. To apply a slope to an existing pipe, navigate to an existing
pipe and select it as the CE, then from the main menu toolbar, select Modify > Pipe Slope.
The Slope Pipe window is displayed:
The Slope Pipe window is a dual purpose window which allows the user to view the details
of the CE and if required define and apply a slope to any number of branches contain within
the pipe element. The window has three panes, the Pipe Details pane displays the details
on the CE and the slope to be applied to it, the Branch legs pane below that displays the
details for the branch legs which are contained within the CE. The pane on the right is 3D
Preview pane which displays a 3D pictorial representation of the CE.
Note: The CE is not actually sloped until Apply is selected.
3D Preview Pane
The 3D graphical view displays a translucent display of the CE with AID graphic lines that
preview the effect of sloping the pipe. Arrows on the lines show the direction of slope while
arrows within the pipe indicate the head to tail direction.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:23
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
If any of the AID graphic lines are drawn in red, this indicates that there is a problem
calculating the slope for that leg of the pipe.
Pipe Details
The Pipe Details pane of the Slope Pipe window displays the CE, the nominal slope and
angle, the direction of the slope.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:24
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The Slope Pipe window does not have the track CE functionality of other modules and
applications in PDMS. To display the details and a pictorial representation for the CE, select
Current pipe, the Slope Pipe window is populated with the details of the CE.
Nominal slope
The slope to apply and the direction to apply it (relative to
the head of each branch). The default is derived from the
SLOREF of the pipe or pipe specification.
Nominal angle
Used as an alternative to 'Nominal slope' to specify the
slope as an angle.
Forwards
When the Forwards checkbox is selected, the slope begins
at the head of the pipe.
Show messages
Displays the Slopes Pipe Messages window populated with
warnings and error messages (if any).
Branch Legs
The Branch legs pane of the Slope Pipe window displays a numbered list of the branches
and the components within the current pipe. In addition to the start and finish component for
the branch leg, the list includes the length of the leg and the drop the leg will have when the
slope is applied. Vertical branch legs are not sloped and therefore always have a drop of
zero.
Once an entry has been selected from the list of available legs, the Branch leg pane of the
Slope Pipe window is automatically populated with the functionality which allows the user to
anchor the selected branch leg and if available modify the slope. The pictorial
representation of the CE is automatically labelled.
If the leg is nominally horizontal, the user can modify the slope for the selected leg.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:25
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
As vertical legs are not sloped, the user cannot modify the slope for the selected branch leg,
but the anchors for the branch leg can be defined.
Select the Slope leg checkbox to specify that the selected branch leg is to be sloped, or
select to uncheck the Slope leg checkbox to forced the selected branch leg to be horizontal.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:26
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The user must now specify the values for the slope, type the slope directly into the 1 in:
field. The Angle field is automatically populated with the corresponding value for the slope.
These fields can be populated the other way round if required.
The direction of the slope can be set by selecting Up or Down from the drop down list.
If necessary the selected branch leg can also be anchored to two different locations by,
adjusting the vertical position of the leg to pass through the anchored positions. The user
can use one or two anchor positions. To select a anchor point, click First anchor and/or
Second anchor.
Note: If two anchors are used, the first anchor must be closer to the start of the branch leg
than the second anchor.
The anchor type is used to specify the position of anchors, the anchor types available for
selection from the Anchor type drop down list are:
None
The branch leg does not have any anchors.
Leg start
Fixes the position of the first anchor at the start of the
branch leg. This position is only available for the first
anchor.
Leg finish
Fixes the position of the second anchor at the end of the
branch leg. This position is only available for the second
anchor.
Leg component
Fixes the position of the anchor(s) at a selected component
within the branch leg.
When the Leg component anchor type is selected, the Branch leg pane of the Slope Pipe
window is automatically updated with further fields requiring user input.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:27
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
The Leg component anchor type selects the component to position the anchor, relative to
its initial position or to another element.
To identify the element, type the name in the Of field or select Pick Element, to pick the
element in the 3D Preview pane.
The Anchor point drop down list determines where on picked component the anchor is to
be positioned, select Top, Centre or Bottom.
To offset each anchor from the previous one by a specified distance relative to a picked
position on the picked element. Type the distance in the Offset field, then the user must
select where to position the anchor relative to a position on the picked element. The From
drop down list determines the position the anchor relative to the Top, Centre or Bottom of
the picked element
When the Leg position anchor type is selected, the Branch leg pane of the Slope Pipe
window is automatically updated with further fields requiring user input.
.
Leg position
The functionality is identical that available for anchor type
branch leg component except that the position of a point on
the leg is fixed.
The horizontal distance from the start of the leg to the fixed position can be entered in the
Distance field or if Pick position is selected, the user must pick the position on the leg in
the 3D Preview pane. The position on the leg is marked in the 3D Preview pane by a thin
circular disc.
To apply the slope, click Apply.
To discard any inputs, click Back, any inputs into the Branch leg pane of the Slope Pipe
window can be reversed.
11.9
Orientate Component
On a typical project, it may be necessary for designers to orientate components depending
on its geometry, once the design has been completed. There are several options supplied
with PDMS. These are all available from the Pipework Application main menu bar.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:28
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
11.9.1
Orientate Leave
The user can set the leave direction for a component which involves a change of direction
(such as an elbow).
Note: Is only applicable to components such as Elbows which have a change of direction.
From the main menu bar, select Orientate > Component > Leave, the Orientate
Component Leave window is displayed:
By default the currently selected element is named in the Component Leave window along
with its coordinates.
In the direction drop-down list the user must choose from a list of available directions and
then must input new coordinates to orientate the leave of the component.
To change the angle of a variable-angle component, select the Angle Change checkbox.
To change the currently selected element named in the Component Leave window along
with its coordinates. Click CE.
Click Apply to change the leave direction of the component, Reset to discard any inputs or
Dismiss to close the Orientate Component Leave window.
11.9.2
Orientate Offset
The user can set the offset direction for a component which has an offset branch (such as a
tee), by setting the direction of its P3 p-point.
From the main menu bar, select Orientate > Component > Offset, the Orientate
Component window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:29
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
By default the currently selected element is named in the Orientate Component window.
The Direction box shows the P3 direction for the current component. The user is required
to input a new direction for P3.
To change the currently selected element named in the Orientate Component window.
Click CE.
Click Apply to change the direction of P3, Reset to discard any inputs or Dismiss to close
the Orientate Component window.
11.9.3
Orientate Slope
The addition of offtol attributes to catalogue ppoints means that certain components can
have a connection whose direction is allowed to be offset within the limits of the offtol angle.
Only one ppoint may have an offtol set. When a ppoint has an offtol set, a new attribute
NOMDIR can be used to set the intended arrive/leave direction of the component.
NOMDIR is the equivalent to the use of zero length bends to generate a small angle in a
joint and is meant to replace the use of zero length bends where possible.
In practice the main use of zero length bends is with tee components where vertical
branches are required from a sloping line. Other possibilities for offsets include flanges
where it might be a requirement to offset slightly from a horizontal flange to obtain a fall.
The supplied catalogues provided by AVEVA contain examples of offset ppoints on P3 of
tees and the leave of flanges. For the purposes of this user guide, the use of offset ppoints
including sloping flanges is described.
As the Slope Ref is set at pipe level, all the branches created below it will automatically use
the same Slope Ref set at pipe level. The user can set an alternative Slope Ref from the
Slope Ref drop-down list.
The user must now set the slope of a component’s leave tube by specifying the required
rate of fall or slope angle. Applies only to a component which involves a change of direction
(such as an elbow). As a result, the Slope window is only displayed where an offset can be
applied, for example, the component has an offset on the ppoint.
From the main menu bar, select Orientate > Component > Slope, the Slope window is
displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:30
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
By default the currently selected element is named in the Slope window along with its
current direction, current slope attributes and direction of flow.
To change the CE, in the Design Explorer, select the required element from the design
database, then click CE.
To apply the current slope to the leave direction of the CE, click Slope. Alternatively the user
can type the required direction into the New Direction field.
Use Form Values
If the branch has not had a slope reference set, the Slope pane of the Slope window is
populated with slope attributes and Use Form Values is selected.
By default the slope of 1/100 and angle 0.5729 is displayed, this will be the slope applied to
the branch, but the user can modify the slope applied to the branch using the Fall, Angle
and Direction functionality available from the Slope window.
The user can set the slope of the branch as a rate of fall or as an angle, click Fall or Angle
input the rate of fall or angle of the pipe.
The user is required to choose the direction of the slope from the Slope drop-down list.
Select Against Flow to place the system into backwards mode.
Or
Select With Flow to place the system into forwards mode.
Select Slope, the slope the new direction is displayed in the New Direction field.
To set the direction, click Apply to change the slope, Reset to discard any inputs or
Dismiss to close the Slope window.
The new direction is now set by setting the NOMDIR attribute of the flange. NOMDIR is now
the leave direction of the flange.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:31
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Modify Pipework
Use Branch Slope
If the branch has a slope reference set, Use Branch Slope is selected and the Fall or
Angle attributes are displayed as the slope reference and are unavailable for modification.
The user is required to choose the direction of the slope from the Slope drop-down list.
Select Against Flow to place the system into backwards mode. Or select With Flow to
place the system into forwards mode.
Select Slope, the slope the new direction is displayed in the New Direction field.
To set the direction, click Apply to change the slope, Reset to discard any inputs or
Dismiss to close the Slope window.
The new direction is now set by setting the NOMDIR attribute of the flange. NOMDIR is now
the leave direction of the flange.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
11:32
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
12
Pipe Splitting
When the pipework design is complete, it is often necessary to spilt the pipes into more than
one branch or pipe as a project requirement or so that the pipe systems can be viewed more
clearly. Pipe can be split on components, planes or into spools. Refer to Pipework Spooling
for further information on spools.
Pipe assemblies are used to aid in the splitting of pipes, refer to Pipe Assemblies for further
information on pipe assemblies.
All of the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with the splitting of pipes is
initiated from a central Split Pipe window which acts as a task hub.
To display the Split Pipe window, select Utilities > Pipe Splitting from the main menu bar.
By default, the Split Pipe window is displayed with the Split/Merge tab selected.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
12.1
Elements to Split
The user can populate the Elements to Split part of the Split Pipe window to the pipe
branch(es) to be split.
Add Ce
Adds the currently selected element in the design hierarchy
into the elements to be split list.
Add Selected
The user will be prompted in the status bar to Pick a pipe
branch (or branches) to split from the 3D graphical view of
the pipework system.
Press esc to finish
12.2
ID Selection
The user is prompted to pick multiple branches in the 3D
graphical view.
Clear all
Remove all of the elements to be split from the list.
Modify Elements to Split
If required, the user can remove individual pipes from the splitting list by clicking the right
mouse button over an element to be removed from the Elements to Split list.
The user must select Remove from list from the displayed menu to remove the selection
from the Elements to Split list.
12.2.1
Spilt Pipe Options
In the split pipe options part of the Spilt Pipe window, the user must now choose how the
pipe will be split, dependent upon which option the user chooses determines the options
available from the Spilt Pipe window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Split Pipes on a Plane - Splits the pipe by inserting an pipe assembly at the point a cutting
plane (which is created, defined and positioned by the user) intersects the pipe, For more
information, refer to Splitting Pipes with a Plane.
Split Pipes into Segments - Splits the pipe into a number of segments using the
dimensions input by the user. The split is defined between two points that are selected by
the user (selection of these points can be achieved by the user choosing either the Feature
pick or Component pick from the Split By drop-down list). For more information, refer to
Split Pipes into Segments.
Split pipe by moving Component - Splits the pipe at the split point and inserts an pipe
assembly at that point. The down-stream components in the branch will then be moved. For
more information, refer to Component Creation Options.
12.2.2
Splitting Pipes with a Plane
When the user chooses Split Pipe on a Plane, the Split Pipe window is displayed with the
relevant options displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Plane definition
Use the Plane definition part of the Spilt Pipe window to define, position and create the
cutting plane.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Input the required Plane size in the Plane Size field, the user can then position the plane
explicitly:
Click
plane.
to display the Offset By fields which allows the user to enter offset values for the
Click
again to return to the explicit position text fields.
To create and modify the plane, select Define Plane, the user is prompted to select an
design element in the 3D graphical view.
Plane in tube definition
The selection of a position within a section of tube results in a plane parallel to the tube at
the picked position.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Plane on a ppoint definition
When the user selects a ppoint on any design element in the 3D graphical view the plane is
positioned at the ppoint with its z direction in line with the ppoint.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Plane on a surface definition
The selection of a surface in the 3D graphical view results in a plane perpendicular to the
picked surface position.
By default the Pipework application displays the plane as a filled representation centred
around the defined plane origin. The on/off checkbox shows or hides the plane, however
the on/off checkbox is automatically selected when the plane is modified.
The user can change how the plane is displayed, from the Plane definition part of the Split
Pipe window. In the Plane Size field, increase the size of the plane and click to clear the Fill
checkbox. The plane is now displayed increased in size and as a wire line representation.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Note: In some instances, it may be necessary to identify ppoints on equipment in the
wireline view.
Positioning the Plane
The plane can be positioned explicitly: from the Plane definition part of the Split Pipe
window, enter the coordinates in the position fields, if required nudge the plane along with
the left and right arrows. The nudge distance is controlled by the nudge increment which is
set to 100mm by default. The plane direction can be changed by entering a valid direction in
the Plane Direction field.
Component Creation Options
When splitting a pipe, the user must define where the components located down stream of
the split and inserted assembly are moved to from the Moving down-stream components
to part of the Spilt Pipe window.
Existing
Pipe assemblies are inserted at the split position in the
currently selected branch.
New Pipe
Components downstream of the spilt will be moved into a
new pipe in the design hierarchy.
New Bran
Components downstream of the spilt will be spilt into extra
branches in the design hierarchy.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Pipe Assemblies
Pipe Assemblies are used as an aid in the pipe splitting process, all of the tasks that a user
would carry out that are associated with the use of assemblies as a splitting aid is initiated
from a central Split Pipe window with the Assembly tab selected which acts as a task hub.
The user can choose from a list of available assemblies in the Filter Assemblies By part of
the Spilt Pipe window. The assemblies available for selection are those already created in
the database, if the user requires an assembly which is not included, refer to Pipe
Assemblies or your system administrator.
Assembly Build Origin
The final option available for plane splitting is the assembly build point; the user must
determine whether to build to the primary or secondary origin of the assembly. The user
must choose from the Assembly build origin drop-down list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
The primary and secondary origin points allows the user some control over where the
assembly is positioned relative to the splitting point.
One of the most common types of assembly used in pipe splitting are a set of break flanges
where the relevant points for positioning the assembly are on either flange face. In this case
the primary origin point would be defined as the leave point (upstream flange face) and the
secondary origin would be defined as being the arrive point (downstream flange face). A
representation of the splitting procedure is as shown:
For more information on Assembly creation and usage, refer to Pipe Assemblies.
12.2.3
Split Pipes
Click Split, the splits is labelled in the 3D graphical view, the Confirm window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
The user is prompted to confirm if the split points are acceptable and the changes can be
accepted or rejected. If rejected, the process is restarted.
The resulting split with pipe assembly is inserted into the pipe:
ID Splitting
Note: This option is only available when splitting a pipe with a plane.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
The user can also split pipes using a defined plane by directly picking pipes using the
mouse cursor. Click ID Split and then use the mouse cursor to select pipes that will be split
relative to the existing plane. Esc must be pressed to exit this mode.
Click Flow to display the direction of flow for the selected pipe.
Click Undo to discard any inputs or Dismiss to close the Split Pipe window.
12.2.4
Split Pipes into Segments
The user can use Split Pipes in Segments, to split a single branch into segments of a userdefined length between components or features picked by the user in the 3D graphical view
(at each split, the choose pipe assembly is inserted). Select Split Pipes into a Segments
from the Split Pipe Options on the Spilt Pipe window to display the Split Pipe window with
the relevant options:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Split By
The user is required to choose the components or selected features adjacent to the pipe to
identify the start and stop of the range selection from the Split By drop-down list. Refer to
Component Picking and Feature Picking for further information.
Split Pipe Length
In the Split Pipe Length drop-down list select Segment Length or Cut Pipe Length:
Segment Length: allows the pipes to be split into segments of a particular length between
selected components or selected features that are adjacent to the pipe. The split is made by
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
inserting pipe assemblies into the branch. Tube length around bends and elbows is
calculated as the centreline length.
Cut Pipe Length: (Used for spool length): allows the pipes to be cut at a particular length
between selected components or selected features that are adjacent to the pipe. The cut is
made by inserting pipe assemblies into the branch. Tube length around bends and elbows is
calculated as the centreline length.
Minimum Final Tube Length - restricts the length of the final tube to the final length value.
If the final tube length is below this value, the previous spools are adjusted to make the final
length within its tolerance.
The user is required to input the following dimensions to the pipe in the Split Pipe Length
part of the Split Pipe window:
•
Segment Length - Segment Length must not be less than 100 or unset, if the user set
the length less than 100 or unset. The Error window is displayed:
•
Minimum Final Tube Length
The downstream components at each split may be inserted into the existing branch, a new
branch or a new pipe depending on what the user chooses from the Move down-stream
components to part of the Spilt Pipe window. If a new branch or pipe is requested, the new
items are given a default name based on the pipe name.
The user must select the assemblies to insert into the branch where the split occurs, for
more information, refer to Pipe Assemblies and Assembly Build Origin. Click Spilt to split
selected pipes using components (for more information, refer to Component Picking) or
selected features adjacent to the pipe (for more information, refer to Feature Picking).
12.2.5
Component Picking
To make a split using picked components, the user will be prompted to identify start of
range selection to select: in the status bar of the 3D graphical view, to start of the range.
After making the selection, the user will be prompted to identify end of range selection to
select: in the status bar of the 3D graphical view, to end the range. Once the range has
been identified, the software will then automatically select the required generic type
component in the current specification. If there is a choice of component and the
specification does not have a default, the Message window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Click OK to display the CHOOSE window:
Select the component from the CHOOSE window.
Click OK to select the alternative component and close the CHOOSE window or CANCEL
to close the CHOOSE window and stop the splitting process.
The assembly (in this case - flanged gasket) is inserted into the pipe at the segment length
and within the identified range.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
12.2.6
Feature Picking
To make a split using picked features adjacent to the pipe (for example - reference to other
parts of the model such as structural steelwork). The user is prompted to identify branch to
split in the status bar at the bottom left hand corner of the 3D graphical view. After making
the selection, the user is prompted to Pick the starting component, this can be a
component or a feature, this is then labelled as the start and the current direction of flow is
shown. It is possible to split from either end of a pipe.
The user is then prompted to Pick the ending component or <esc> to split branch: after
making the selection, the user is prompted to identify section of branch where split will
intersect.
Once the range has been identified, the software will then automatically select the required
generic type component in the current specification. If there is a choice of component and
the specification does not have a default, the Message window is displayed:
Click OK to display the CHOOSE window:
Select the component from the CHOOSE window.
Click OK to select the alternative component and close the CHOOSE window or CANCEL
to close the CHOOSE window and stop the splitting process.
The function will now insert an assembly at the intersection between the selected feature on
the steelwork and the selected tube and will continue to split between the start and end point
as per the component splitting method.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Click Flow to display the current direction of flow, Undo to discard any changes in the 3D
graphical view or Dismiss to close the Split Pipe window.
12.2.7
Split Pipe by moving Component
To make a split by moving a component, select Split pipe by moving component from the
Split Pipe Option part of the Split Pipe window. Once the selection has been made, where
to move the components down-stream of the split (selection) must be selected. After
selecting to where to move down-stream components. Click Split.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
The user is prompted to identify branch to split in the status bar at the bottom left hand
corner of the 3D graphical view. After making the selection the user is prompted to Pick the
piping component.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Once the piping component has been selected, the pipe is split at this point and all the
components down stream of the split (component selected) are moved to a new pipe or
branch in the design hierarchy.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:21
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
12.3
Merge branch/pipe
As part of a project or design requirement, it may be necessary to merge individual piping
components to form a single pipe or branch.
If necessary, navigate to the CE into which the others are to be merged, from the Merge
Unit part of the Split Pipe window, select:
One Pipe
Merges all the components into one pipe
One Bran
Merges all the components into one branch
From the Perform Commands part of the Split Pipe window, click Merge, the user is
prompted to ‘Pick a Piping component - source element’ in the status bar at the top left
hand corner of the 3D graphical view. The section is highlighted in red, after making the
selection the user is prompted to ‘Pick Piping Component - target element’.
Note: All sections to be merged must share a common axis with the current element, as
defined by the line through their start and end positions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:22
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
Once the sections have been selected, the components are merged into one pipe or branch.
All material properties for the merged section will be taken from the settings for the CE.
When sections are unable to be merged, the following Error message is displayed:
Click Flow to display the current direction of flow, Undo to discard any inputs or Dismiss to
close the Split Pipe window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:23
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Splitting
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
12:24
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13
Pipework Spooling
SPOOLER is the pipework spooling module for AVEVA PDMS. It allows the user to split the
pipework design into logical sections (spools) ready for fabrication. The spool data can then
be output as isometric drawings using ISODRAFT. Refer to the ISODRAFT User Guide for
further information.
SPOOLER works with Spool Drawings (SPLDRGs), which are created by selecting an
interconnected network of piping components to be added to the drawing. Once the user
has selected the elements, the application checks that the selections from a valid piping
network.
Spool Drawings contain a number of complete Spool and Field elements, divided by Spool
Breaks, where a SPOOL is defined as a run of piping components and tube that will be
connected during fabrication and a FIELD is an individual or group of piping components
that will be connected on-site during the erection phase. Spools cannot be split across Spool
Drawings.
Spool Breaks are normally defined by the software, when the application detects a change
in the status of the Shop Flag (where the Shop Flag indicates whether the component will be
included in a fabricated assembly (SHOP) or fitted during the erection phase (FIELD)). You
can also force spool breaks manually, at joints where the Shop Flags are the same on all
sides, and add Welds, to split pipes, in the design.
By setting the SFLimit (Spool/Field Limit) attribute for a SPLDRG to either BRAN, PIPE,
ZONE or SITE, a spool break will be enforced at any change at the corresponding element
level.
For additional information on some important aspects of the SPOOLER module see
SPOOLER Reference Information.
Pipe Sketches.
13.1
Database Usage
SPOOLER uses two databases:
•
Fabrication database - contains all the spooling data.
•
DESIGN database - contains all the design data for the project.
SPOOLER has full read/write access to the Fabrication database but has only limited
access to the DESIGN database, only being allowed to change attributes relevant to the
fabrication of the pipework (e.g. specifying Field Welds).
SPOOLER uses two databases:
•
Fabrication database, which stores all the spooling data
•
DESIGN database, which holds all the design data for the project.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
SPOOLER has full access to the Fabrication database allowing you to set-up the hierarchy
and add or delete elements at will. Whereas, SPOOLER has only limited access to the
DESIGN database, to make changes that are relevant to the fabrication of the piping.
13.1.1
Database Structure
The Fabrication database structure descends from the World level (usually represented by
the symbolic name /*). The administrative levels below this (and their PDMS abbreviations)
are Department (ISODEP) and Registry (ISOREG).
The database level below Registry (and its PDMS abbreviation) is the Spool Drawing
(SPLDRG), which is the main operational unit of the database. Each Spool Drawing can
represent a continuous network of piping components and tube within the overall piping
design The Spools and Fields that make up the Spool Drawing are held directly below it in
the database hierarchy.
The DESIGN database also descends from the World level, below which are the
administrative sub-levels Site and Zone. In the case of piping design data, the lower
administrative levels (and their PDMS abbreviations) are Pipe (PIPE) and Branch (BRAN).
Together, these hierarchic levels give the following overall format
13.2
Prepare the Site for Spooling
The consistency of the data should have been checked before the model was sent for
spooling. However, it is best practice to check that the design data in the design model is
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
consistent and make any changes (inserting shop or field welds) to the design model that
are obviously needed after inspection, before any spooling is carried out.
The SPOOLER module will not operate correctly if there are errors in the consistency
check, warnings will not affect the operation.
Make sure the ZONE SPOOLER-PIPE element in the Design Explorer is the CE. Select
Utilities > Data Consistency, from the main menu bar, which displays the Data
Consistency Check window.
13.2.1
Inspect the Site
The easiest way of inspecting the site is a visual check of the site looking for any possible
problems (e.g. very long pipes or complex networks) and for any parts wanted separately,
for test purposes. As the spools are completely assembled before they are shipped to the
erection site, they must be small enough to be transported. The maximum acceptable size is
dependent upon project requirements and the length of the supplied pipe, so any lengths
greater than this in one spool will have to be joined with a Shop weld. For more information,
refer to Measure the Pipe Lengths and Insert Shop and Field Welds.
13.2.2
Measure the Pipe Lengths
After inspection, if the user believes a pipe is too large to be shipped as a single spool and
will therefore require the insertion of welds or the length of pipe was too long to be created
from a single length of tube. Select Query > Measure Distance from the main menu to
display the Measure Distance window.
The user will be prompted to Measure distance start (Snap) Snap: to identify the pipe to
be measured. After selection in the 3D graphical view, the user is then prompted to
Measure distance end (Snap) Snap:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
The distance and offset co-ordinates are labelled in the 3D graphical view, and the Measure
window will be populated with length, Offset co-ordinates, and direction of the selected pipe.
Click Close to close the Measure window.
13.2.3
Insert Shop and Field Welds
The SPOOLER module allows the user to insert Shop and Field welds to split up the long or
complex piping networks. Field welds can be used to cut a pipe into shorter lengths or break
up a network where there are no convenient joints, these welds will be made at the erection
site. Shop welds can be used to separate parts or assemblies that need to be fabricated and
tested before being attached to other parts of the spool. Welds can be inserted to break a
piping network at a p-point of a particular component or at some defined point along a length
of a pipe.
If a component needs to be tested in the fabrication shop before shipping and then
connected to pipes and other components at the erection site. The user will need to insert
Field welds., where possible, welds should be inserted at a p-point (Design Point) of a
welded component, because the component is attached to the pipe by a weld anyway, so it
is not creating any extra work just moving the location for the work from the Fabrication
Shop to the Erection Site.
Select Create > Weld, from the main menu bar to display the Create Weld window:
The Create Weld window is a dual purpose window, which allows the user to insert a weld
at a design point or at a position in the tube (pipe).
Insert a Weld at a Design Point
By default the Create Weld window is displayed with Design selected in the At drop-down
list.
In the Type drop-down list select Field or Shop.
In the Allowance box, input the fitting allowance.
Click Apply, the user is prompted to Pick a Design Point for WELD.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Once the selection has been identified, the software will then automatically select the
required weld in the current specification. If there is a choice and the specification does not
have a default, the CHOOSE window is displayed populated with these choices.
After selecting the type of weld to use, the user must click OK to insert the weld or CANCEL
to discard any selection and close the CHOOSE window.
Once the selection has been made, the weld is inserted at the design point and the weld is
displayed in the design hierarchy as a welded element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Split a Tube with a Weld
To insert a weld at a position in tube (pipe), change the At drop-down list from Design Point
to In Tube, the Create Weld window is displayed:
In the Type drop-down list select Field or Shop.
In the Distance box, enter the distance along the pipe to insert the weld.
In the drop-down list, select From Previous, In Front of Item or Behind Item:
•
Click From Previous - Inserts the weld the specified distance from a reference
element (selected by the user).
•
Click In Front of item - Inserts the weld the specified distance in front of the reference
element (selected by the user).
•
Click Behind Item - Inserts the weld the specified distance behind the reference
element (selected by the user).
In the Allowance box, input the fitting allowance.
Click Apply, the user is prompted to Pick a position in tube for WELD, after making the
selection the user is prompted to Pick an element for WELD distance. After the selection
the weld is inserted into the tube at the specified distance from the element.
Click Dismiss to discard any inputs and close the Create Weld window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.2.4
Create Spool Break
A Spool Break is the change over point between SHOP and FIELD components. It occurs at
the junction of two piping components (or implied TUBE) that fulfils one of the following
cases:
The Shop Flag status of the two components is different. i.e. True-to-False or False-to- True.
The Shop Flag status of elements in the DESIGN database can be changed in SPOOLER
use Modify > Shop/Field, from the main menu.
If a component is the end of the piping network (e.g. connected to an EQUIpment item) it is
automatically the end of the Spool/Field and the Spool Drawing.
BOTH piping components have their spool break attributes set to true (CSFBREAK for a
piping component and TSFBREAK for the leave tube).
To create a spool break, select Create > Spool Break from the main menu bar. The user is
prompted to Pick first element to add Spool Break, after selection the user is again
prompted to Pick second element to add Spool Break.
13.3
Pipework Spooler
The SPOOLER module works with spooling networks, which are created by selecting
pipework elements to be added to a spool drawing (SPLDRG). The selected elements must
form an interconnected piping network but are not limited to a single branch or pipe in the
design model.
Spooling networks consist of interconnected spools and fields. Where a SPOOL is defined
as a run of piping components and tube that will be connected during fabrication and a
FIELD is an individual or group of piping components that will be connected during the
erection phase.
Spools and fields are defined by picking an element in the 3D View window. If the element
has been defined as a fabrication element (i.e. the SHOP Flag is true) it generates a
SPOOL. Whereas, if the selected element has been defined as being fitted on site (i.e. the
SHOP Flag is false) it generates a FIELD.
When an element is picked, the software searches all connected piping components and
tube and then adds all adjacent components that have the same SHOP Flag status to that
spool or field. The ends of the spools, called SPOOL BREAKS, occur when the SHOP Flag
status changes.
You can also force SPOOL BREAKS by defining Field Welds or Joints at the required point
in the SPOOL. Field welds can be used to split a piping section at a particular component or
at some defined point along a length of tube. The forced spool break is used to create a
break at joint that does not have a field element in it (for example: a flanged joint with no
gasket).
By setting the SFLimit (Spool/Field Limit) attribute for a SPLDRG to either BRAN, PIPE,
ZONE or SITE (the default is WORLD), a spool break will be enforced at any change at the
corresponding element level.
SPOOLING NETWORKS can be defined by picking each SPOOL and FIELD in sequence,
to add to the SPOOL DRAWING or by picking two ends of a continuous piping network.
SPOOLER checks that it is an interconnected network before it adds all the spools and
fields to the SPOOL DRAWING.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.3.1
Spooler Toolbar
The Spooler toolbar gives quick access to all the tasks associated with the creation and
modification of Piping Spools.
Depending on the selections made from the Spooler toolbar, the user will be presented with
further windows prompting for user input and options and allowing for the workflow to
continue.
The toolbar for the Spooler module is automatically displayed, in the main menu bar once
the module has been entered.
13.3.2
Update Current Spool
Drawing
Updates the numbering on the current spool drawing.
Modify Current Spool
Drawing
Modifies the current spool drawing.
Name of Active Spool
Drawing
Displays the name of the current spool drawing.
Navigate Pick Mode
Allows the user to pick elements in the 3D graphical view.
Add to Spool Drawing
Pick Mode
Allows the user to select anywhere on the pipework, the
spool is added the spool drawing and a FIELD is
automatically created for the gasket.
Remove to Spool
Drawing Pick Mode
Allows the user to select anywhere on the pipework, the
spool is removed from the spool drawing and a FIELD is
automatically created for the gasket.
Include Field
Connections
Spooler will automatically add any adjacent field elements,
such as the gasket on the end of the pipe.
Create Spool Drawings
Before selecting pipework elements to be added to a spool drawing (SPLDRG). The spool
drawing hierarchy must be created in the Fabrication database. From more information on
the hierarchy, refer to Database Structure and DRAFT User Guide.
To create a spool drawing, select Create > Spool Drawing from the main menu bar, to
display the Create SPLDRG window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
This becomes the Current Element (CE) in the Fabrication Explorer and is displayed as
the active Spool Drawing in the text box on the SPOOLER tool bar.
Select Adjacent Field Components
Gaskets on the ends of pipes (e.g. between a flange and the nozzle of an equipment)
cannot be picked in the 3D graphical view and therefore cannot be manually added to a
Spool Drawing. To overcome this problem, the user can automatically include adjacent field
components, as separate FIELDs, when a spool is added to a Spool Drawing. From the
SPOOLER Toolbar, select Include Field Components.
Add Pipework Elements to a Spool Drawing
To add pipework elements to a spool drawing, select Add to Spool Drawing from the
SPOOLER tool bar. The user is prompted to Pick a Piping Component to add to
SPLDRG:. After selection the pipework element is added to the spool drawing and the
Fabrication hierarchy as a SPOOL element.
The user can continue to add several pipework elements to the spool drawing and the
fabrication hierarchy, to exit press Esc.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.3.3
Number the Spool Drawing
The numbering of spool drawings is normally used to provide full accountability and repeat
ability through design changes. The parts numbers can be automatically applied to
complete Spool Drawings, the default setting, or the parts can be numbered for each spool
individually.
To define what elements of the spools are to be numbered, select Settings > Numbering
from the main menu to display the Numbering Settings window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
All of the principle data for numbering settings are available from the Numbering Settings
window.
The user can select what data has a number setting, click to check the appropriate
checkboxes, from the Include part of the Number Settings window. After the selection has
been made, the user can define the Default spool prefix.
Select how the numbering will be applied, from the part numbering drop-down list, the user
can choose to apply the numbering per SPLDRG or per SPOOL.
The numbers shown in the Design Explorer are for indication purposes only. They only
match the real spool numbers when the Spool Drawing is first numbered. When the
numbering is updated after something has been changed (e.g. inserted a field weld to split a
spool) the members list numbers get out of synchronisation with the real numbers. The way
the spools are numbered, once updating is applied can be changed by selecting from the
three options in the Update Choice Handling part of the Numbering Settings window:
•
Use first available data - The first spool in which the data has changed will
automatically pick up the first available number. When there are no more existing
numbers new data is generated for any remaining spools.
•
Always generate new data - Existing numbers are ignored and new data is generated
for all affected spools.
•
Manual data selection - The Select Data for Spool Element window is displayed
from which the user can select an existing number to use for the modified spool or
whether to generate new data.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
The Select Data for Spool Elements window is populated with the Spool numbers and
available attribute data.
Click Use selected data to use the existing numbers or click Generate new data to use
new numbers.
Click Cancel to close the Select Data for Spool Elements window.
Click OK to save the numbering settings and close the Numbering Settings window.
Click Cancel to close the Numbering Settings window.
To generate the numbering, select Update/Number from the SPOOLER tool bar, the
Update/Number Spool Drawing window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Click Apply, the software carries out a check of the Spool Drawing numbering, this will take
a few seconds and then displays the Update/Number Spool Drawing window, with the
results of the check shown in the Status part of the Update/Number Spool Drawing
window.
Click Dismiss to close the Check Spool Drawing window.
13.3.4
Check Numbering
Once any changes have been made, it is best practice to check the spool drawing before
producing an isometric. Spooler automatically checks the spool drawing, all of the results
are displayed in the Check Spool Drawing window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Click Dismiss to close the Check Spool Drawing window.
13.3.5
Spool Shipping Volume
While it may be logical to have a long pipe as one spool, if that pipe is too large to be
transported the spool may need to be split. The size of a spool can be checked in the
SPOOLER module by querying the spool shipping volume.
To check the spool shipping volume make sure the required spool element is selected as
the CE in the Fabrication Explorer. From the main menu bar, select Query > Spool
Shipping Volume, the Spool Shipping Volume window is displayed:
The Spool Shipping Volume window is populated with the name of the Spool and its
Shipping Volume.
13.4
Modify > SPLDRG Order
To modify the existing order of the SPLDRG without changing the design hierarchy, from the
main menu bar, select Modify > SPLDRG Order, the user is prompted to Pick element to
reorder SPLDRG Order from:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
After the selection has been made the order of the SPLDEG order has been changed,
without changing the design hierarchy.
13.5
Modify > MTO Status
To modify the MaterialTakeOff (MTO) Status information required for the backing sheet of
the Pipe Sketch. From the main menu bar, select Modify > MTO Status, the Set MTO
status on isometric window is displayed:
The name of the Piping component is displayed in the Piping component part of the Set
MTO status on isometric window. The Right Arrow button moves to the Next element in
the pipework network (downwards) and the Left Arrow takes you to the previous element
(upwards).
In the Set MTO status on isometric window, the Drawing and MTO is also shown. In the
drop-down list, the user can choose from a list of available options for the drawing and MTO
status.
Click Apply to change the Drawing and MTO status or Dismiss to close the Set MTO
status on isometric window.
13.5.1
Changing the Shop/Field Setting
When an element is picked, the software searches all connected piping components and
tube and adds all the components that have the same SHOP Flag status to that spool or
field. The ends of the spool are called SPOOL BREAKS and they occur where the Shop
Flag status changes.
If the Shop Flag is true the selected components are added as a Spool. Whereas, if the
Shop Flag status is false the components are added as a Field.
The Shop Flag status for a piping component is normally set by its attributes in the DESIGN
catalogue, but this may have been changed by the designer or from within the SPOOLER
module. Can be used to break up a spool or to remove a spool break, where the user wants
the whole assembly to be fabricated as one piece in the shop.
Note: Any changes you make to the Shop Flag settings are added to the design model in
the DESIGN database.
To check and change the Shop Flag setting of the welded valves for any element in the
piping network.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
From the SPOOLER tool bar, select Navigate Pick Mode to identify the component with the
welds to be changed From the main menu bar, select Modify > Shop/Field, the Shop/Field
window is displayed:
The name of the Piping component is displayed in the Piping component part of the Shop/
Field window. The Right Arrow button moves to the Next element in the pipework network
(downwards) and the Left Arrow takes you to the previous element (upwards).
In the Shop/Field window, the status of the Shop/Field Flag is also shown, (Fabrication or
Erection). To change the status of the Flag, select Fabrication material or Erection
material.
Click Apply to change the status of the flag, then update the Spool Drawing or Dismiss to
close the Shop/Field window.
Note: The Flag can only be changed on one piping component at a time.
13.5.2
Spool Break at a Joint
The user can also split spools by defining SPOOL BREAKS at Joints in the network, even
though the Shop Flags on either side of the joint are the same. e.g. a flanged joint with no
gasket.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
The Spool Break is forced by changing the CSFBREAK attributes for the selected piping
components to True. When SPOOLER finds two adjacent True CSFBREAK or TSFBREAK
attributes it inserts a Spool Break between them.
This function could be used to split pipes at any component, but this would create problems
during the Erection phase because no method of connecting the two parts would be shown
on the drawings.
Note: Any Spool Breaks you define changes the flags of those components in the DESIGN
database.
Forced Spool Breaks can also be removed by selecting Delete > Spool Break from the
main menu bar. The user is then prompted to select the two piping components to reset the
C/TSFBREAK attributes on.
Force a Spool Break at a Specified Element Level
To force a spool break at any change of Branch, Pipe, Zone or Site, set the SFLimit (Spool/
Field Limit) attribute for the SPLDRG to BRAN, PIPE, ZONE or SITE, respectively. The
default setting is WORLD.
13.6
Modify > Design Plotfile
If an isometric is created for the branch containing the component to be modified, the user
can browse for the isometric. Select Modify > Detail Plotfile from the main menu bar to
display the Detail Plotfile window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
The name of the Piping component is displayed in the Component part of the Detail
Plotfile window. The Right Arrow button moves to the Next element in the pipework
network (downwards) and the Left Arrow takes you to the previous element (upwards).
The Components with detail plotfile part of the Detail Plotfile window displays all the
piping components which have had isometrics created.
To locate the appropriate isometric, click Browse, to navigate to the required isometric.
Once the isometric has been found, it is displayed in the Detail Plotfile part of the Detail
Plotfile window.
13.7
Modify > Attached Welds
Attached Welds (AWELD) components provide a method for numbering the welds required
for welded attachments. Typically these are used to secure the piping network to the support
ATTAchments. The number of welds on each attachment can be defined in SPOOLER.
Select Modify > Attached Welds, from the main menu bar to display the Number of
Attached Welds window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
The name of the Piping component is displayed in the Piping Component part of the
Number of Attached Welds window. The Right Arrow button moves to the Next element
in the pipework network (downwards) and the Left Arrow takes you to the previous element
(upwards).
Input the required number of welds on each attachment.
Click Apply to change the number of attached welds or Dismiss to close the Number of
Attached Welds window.
13.8
Display/Modify
All of the elements created in PDMS have attributes, either general or special. Each element
has different attributes that can be displayed or modified, because of this the Pipework
application uses a common layout for windows that are presented to the user. For the same
reason this document only includes a detailed description of how to display or modify one
set of element data. The information can be applied to the same processes that are used to
display/modify all other types of element data.
To display or modify any of the attributes in the currently selected SPLDRG, select Modify >
Attributes from the main menu bar to display the Display/Modify SPLDRG window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
The SPLDRG attributes are displayed in a scrollable list in spldrg Attributes part of the
Display/Modify SPLDRG window. To display or modify part numbers, select Part Numbers
to display the Display/Modify Data for Part Numbers window:
The Display/Modify Data for Part Numbers window is populated with all the part numbers
from the SPLDRG, to display the attributes for a selected part number, the user must select
a part number in the Part number’s part of the Display/Modify Data for Part Numbers
window. The attributes are now displayed in the Attribute data part of the Display/Modify
Data for Part Numbers window.
To modify an attribute, the user must select the attribute in the Attribute data part of the
Display/Modify Data for Part Numbers window. Select Name, the Modify Name Attribute
window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
The user is required to modify the name of the attribute in Name field.
Click OK to modify the name of the attribute and close the Modify Name Attribute window
or Cancel to discard any inputs.
Not all attributes can be changed such as position, orientation, gradient, Lbore, Itlength,
Itposition.
Refer to Isometric Drawings for further information on outputting spool data.
13.8.1
Isometric Drawings
Drawings have to be produced for the fabrication of the spools. It is done using the PDMS
ISODRAFT module which provides very powerful facilities for plotting any specified
isometric view of all or any of the Spool Drawings. The views are annotated to show the
updated numbering and connection information and have an associated parts list. The list is
split into two sections:
•
Fabrication materials
•
Erection materials.
Refer to the ISODRAFT User Guide for further information on ISODRAFT.
13.8.2
Preview Isometrics
Previews of the isometric drawings of pipe systems or pipes can be viewed as though the
user had used ISODRAFT to produced them.
To preview a pipe, select Utilities > Pipe Isometric from the main menu, to display the
Preview Isometric Drawing window. Refer to Preview Isometrics for further information.
To preview a pipe system, the user must select Utilities > System Isometric from the main
menu to display the Preview Isometric Drawing window. Refer to Preview Isometrics for
further information.
13.9
SPOOLER Reference Information
The Spooler Reference Information provides additional information on some important
aspects of the SPOOLER module, which is intended for experienced users and system
administrators, to enable them to modify existing databases and catalogues making them
compatible with SPOOLER.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:21
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.9.1
Spool Breaks
A Spool Break is the change over point between SHOP and FIELD components. It occurs at
the junction of two piping components (or implied TUBE) that fulfils one of the following
cases:
1. The Shop Flag status of the two components is different. i.e. True-to-False or False-toTrue. In SPOOLER the Shop Flag status of elements in the DESIGN database can be
changed, use Modify > Shop/Field from the main menu bar.
2. If a component is the end of the piping network (e.g. connected to an EQUIpment item)
it is automatically the end of the Spool/Field and the Spool Drawing.
3. BOTH piping components have their spool break attributes set to true (CSFBREAK for
a piping component and TSFBREAK for the leave tube). A condition which can be
forced use Create > Spool Break from the main menu bar in SPOOLER.
Note: TSFBREAK is an attribute of the piping component not the leave tube. Although its
effect is on the leave tube.
13.9.2
Connection Types
The p-points of every piping component have associated connection types, derived from
their catalogue definitions. These are used in conjunction with the Connection Compatibility
(COCO) tables, in the database, to check if two components may be legally connected to
each other.
Note: The connection type for the arrive and leave points of a TUBI component are always
derived from p-point P1 of the tube catalogue element.
This functionality has been extended for SPOOLER so that it also specifies what type of
connection it is. The type of connection is identified by the Ckey attribute, which is added to
the COCO element definition. The Ckey attribute can be set to any of the standard
ISODRAFT end connection types:
Ckey
Connection Type
BW
Butt weld
SW
Socket weld
SC
Screwed connection
CP
Compression
FL
Flanged
PL
Plain
If the Ckey attribute is left unset, the connection is assumed to be ‘Plain’.
13.9.3
Weld and Joint Connections
Connections between piping components (and tube) come in two forms: welds and nonwelded joints (e.g. flanged, screwed or compression connections). The welds and joints are
grouped in the fabrication database in the WLDGRP (Weld Group) and JNTGRP(Joint
Group) elements, respectively. These groups are created, by default, when numbering is
first inserted into the Spool Drawing.
A connection is considered to belong to a Spool Drawing if:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:22
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.9.4
•
Both piping components involved in the connection belong to that Spool Drawing.
•
The downstream piping component in the connection is on one end of the piping
network in that Spool Drawing.
•
In the case of a flanged joint with a gasket, the flange owning the gasket is on that
Spool Drawing.
Types of Welds and Joints
SPOOLER uses three types of weld definitions and one type of joint definition. These are:
Definition
Description
IWELD
Implied weld
RWELD
Real weld
AWELD
Attached weld
IJOINT
Implied joint
The types of welds and joints are described in the following sections.
Implied Welds
IWELD components provide a link in the Fabrication database to the position of a weld that
must be inserted to join two piping components or tubes. For example: fit a flange onto the
end of a tube. You do not have to explicitly define these welds as they are implied by the
nature of the components involved.
A connection can have an IWELD element associated with it if:
•
It has a Ckey (Connection key) of types BW or SW.
Note: If you have explicitly defined a weld (RWELD element) to connect the two
components, the software will not insert a implied weld at that point.
Real Welds
RWELD components link to explicitly defined Shop or Field welds in the DESIGN database.
They are normally inserted in DESIGN but can also be added in SPOOLER, to break up a
spool.
Attached Welds
AWELD components provide a method for numbering the welds required for welded
attachments. Typically these are used to secure the piping network to the support
ATTAchments. The number of welds on each attachment can be defined in SPOOLER, use
the Modify > Attached Welds from the main menu bar.
Implied Joints
IJOINT components define the connection between two non-welded piping components or
tubes (e.g. bolted flanges, compression joints or screwed connections). The user does not
have to explicitly define the details of these joints as they are implied by the nature of the
components involved.
A connection can have an IJOINT element associated with it if:
•
It has a Ckey (Connection key) of types CP, FL or SC.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:23
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
•
Neither of the components are Gaskets.
13.10 Special Cases
The following sub-sections contain descriptions of some special cases within SPOOLER.
13.10.1 Shop Flag Status
The Shop Flag Status describes some of the special cases for the Shop Flag. These can
effect the placement of Spool Breaks and the handling of some elements.
ATTAchments
While ATTAs do have a Shop Flag, its status is ignored when spooling a piping network. For
example: a shop false ATTA will not break a spool.
Note: The leave tube of a spec break ATTA (SPECBR attribute is True) still has an active
Shop Flag.
13.10.2 Leave Tubes of Welds
If the user breaks a spool by inserting a field weld into the leave tube after the last
component in a pipe, the section between the weld and the end of the tube is reassigned as
the leave tube of the weld. Inserting a field weld is a modification to the DESIGN database
and immediately after its creation the weld and its leave tube are not in the Spool Drawing.
The user can add the weld and its leave tube by updating the numbering of the Spool
Drawing, in the normal way.
13.10.3 Welds for OLETs
An OLET element has 3 p-points: P1 (p-arrive) and P2 (p-leave) in the main tube and P3 in
the off-line leg. P1 and P2 are coincident and are normally treated as a single point.
A problem could occur if points P1 and P2 have Ckeys of BWD or SWD. By default this
should give two welds, one for each point, but the software recognises the OLET as a
special case and only allocates one weld.
13.11 Pipe Piece and Pipe Spool Data
The following contains the detailed system-specific information about pipe pieces and pipe
spools. It includes the underlying objects and functionality and the database attributes and
pseudo-attributes.
13.11.1 PML Methods
The pipe piece manager has no exposed functions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:24
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.11.2 Pipe Piece Functionality
The functionality of the pipe pieces and pipe spools is as follows:
Function
Description
Invalidate all verified
Set appropriate validation attributes
Query bend activities
Returns bending activities
Delete pipe pieces
13.11.3 Pipe Piece Attributes
The Pipe Piece attributes are displayed below:
Attribute
Type
Default Get
Set
User
Remarks
Spool Pipe
Mngr Mngr
Fab.
Mngr
Machine
Bent
BOOLEAN False
9
9
9
Bending
Machine
Reference
DBREF
9
9
9
Bending
with flow
BOOLEAN True
9
Auto
Welded
Start
ENUM
9
9
Auto
Welded
End
ENUM
9
9
Welding
Machine
Reference
DBREF
9
9
9
9
User Start REAL
Excess
0
Bend
M/C
Weld
M/C
Stock
Len.
May not be
required
9
9
The system should always remember user excesses. Start/End excesses are used only
where the relevant start/end flanges are manually welded. The cut length calculation should
always user the greater value of the user or bend machine excess.
Bend M/C REAL
Start
Excess
0
9
User End REAL
Excess
0
9
Bend M/C REAL
End Excess
0
9
Feed
Excess
REAL
ARRAY
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
9
9
9
9
9
13:25
9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Attribute
Type
Default Get
Set
User
Stock
Length
Value
REAL
0
9
Remarks
Spool Pipe
Mngr Mngr
Fab.
Mngr
Bend
M/C
Weld
M/C
9
Stock
Len.
9
9
Holds the
stock
length that
was
checked
against
Pipe piece BOOLEAN False
verified
9
Pipe piece BOOLEAN True
modified
9
9
Invisible to
user
Pipe piece BOOLEAN False
contains
bends
9
9
Invisible to
user
Invisible to
user
13.11.4 Pipe Piece Pseudo Attributes
The Pipe Piece Pseudo attributes are displayed below:
Attribute
Comment
Attribute Name
Arrive position
HPOS on branch or LPOS of first component
APOS
Leave position
TPOS on branch or APOS of last component
LPOS
Arrive direction
HDIR on branch or LDIR of first component
ADIR
Leave direction
TDIR on branch or ADIR of last component
LDIR
Arrive connection LCON of start component
type
ACON
Leave connection ACON of end component
type
LCON
Arrive component The first component of the Pipe Piece
PPAREF
Leave
component
PPLREF
The Last Component of the Pipe Piece
Arrive flange req Returns whether the start flange should be
welding
considered for pre-welding, i.e. shop = true and
loose = false
Leave flange req Returns whether the end flange should be
welding
considered for pre-welding, i.e. shop = true and
loose = false
Nominal bore
HBOR on branch or LBOR of start component
PPNBOR
Outside diameter
HOD on branch or LOD of start component
PPOUTD
Material
Returns the MATR attribute of the spec of the first MATREF
component
Specification
HSTU on branch or LSTU of first component
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:26
SPRE
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Attribute
Comment
Attribute Name
Wall thickness
The wall thickness of the implied tube of the pipe WALLTH
piece. Uses the OUTD and ACBO attributes from
the property database.
Cut length
Calculated using relevant information
PPCUTL
Finished length
MTCL
PPFINL
Bend radii
Array of radius of bends for pipe piece
PPBRAD
Bend ratio
Array of Ratio of radius to OD of bends for pipe PPBRAT
piece Ratio of radius to OD
Angle
between The required angle between flanges at pipe piece PPANFL
flanges
ends before the pipe piece is bent.
Get pipe piece Returns all the components within the pipe piece
components
PPAREF
Fabrication
machine verified
True/False - verifies if modified flag is true
PPFMCV
length True/False - verifies if modified flag is true
PPSTOV
Stock
verified
13.12 Pipe Spool Manager
The Pipe Spool Manager contains the detailed system-specific information about pipe
pieces and pipe spools. It includes the underlying objects and functionality and the database
attributes and pseudo-attributes.
13.12.1 PML Methods
The pipe spool manager has the following exposed functions:
Name
Result
Description
.generatePipeSpools(DBREF)
.getPipePieces(DBREF)
ARRAY
.getBranchElements(DBREF)
ARRAY
Returns all the pipe elements
contained in the spool which includes
tubes.
.getMTOElements(DBREF)
ARRAY
Returns the pipe pieces and other
components need in
.getBendingTables(DBREF)
ARRAY
.getWeldingTables(DBREF)
ARRAY
.getActivityTables(DBREF)
ARRAY
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:27
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.12.2 Functionality
The pipe spool manager has the following functionality:
Function
Description
Autonaming
13.12.3 Pipe Spool Functionality
The pipe spool manager has the following pipe spool functionality;
Function
Description
MTO
Fabrication activities
Bending information
Welding information
End points
2D array of start and end points of the segments of a pipe spool
13.12.4 Pipe Spool Members
The pipe spool manager has the following pipe spool members:
Name
Type
Description
.pipeSpool
DBREF
Pipe Spool element
13.12.5 Pipe Spool Methods (not implemented)
The pipe spool manager has the following pipe spool methods:
Name
Type
Description
.getMtoTables(DB_Ele
ment)
ARRAY of
Pass an array of attributes.
Results in a table / 2 dimensional array:
Rows = all elements in the pipe spool.
Columns = Attribute values requested.
.getAssemblyTables()
ARRAY
Results in a table / 2 dimensional array:
Table of information to put on the pipe sketch
Assembly Activities Table
.getEndpointTable()
ARRAY
Results in a table / 2 dimensional array:
Connection number and X, Y and Z positions for
the open ends of the pipe spool
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:28
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Name
Type
Description
.getEndPointTags()
ARRAY
Results in a table / 2 dimensional array:
PPoint/Element and text to allow this text to be
tagged on the pipe sketch.
The
tags
correspond
to
.EndPointTable() for cross-reference
ARRAY
.getPlaneTags()
the
Results in a table / 2 dimensional array: PPoint/
Element and text to allow this text to be tagged
on the pipe sketch.
The tags correspond to the Planes referenced on
the .getAssembly() table for cross-reference
13.12.6 Pipe Spool Attributes
The Pipe Spool attributes are displayed as shown:
Attribute
Type
Default
Get
Set
User
Remarks
Spool
Mngr
Pipe
Mngr
Fab.
Mngr
Bend
M/C
Weld
M/C
Stock
Len.
Name
name
UNSET
9
9
PSARFA
Array
DB_Element
UNSET
9
9
Array of the
arrive elements
PSLRFA
Array
DB_Element
UNSET
9
9
Array of the
leave elements
13.12.7 Pipe Spool Pseudo Attributes
The pipe spool manager has the following Pseudo attributes:
Attribute
Comment
PPRFA
List of pipe pieces within the spool, will NOT generate pipe pieces
BELRFA
List of piping elements within the spool
BELTYP
List of piping elements types within the spool
MELRFA
List of MTO components needed to construct the pipe spool
PSVLD
If all the pipe pieces are valid this is true.
13.13 Pipe Spool Reporting Data
The Pipe Spool Reporting Data contains the detailed system-specific reporting information
about pipe spools.
13.13.1 MTO
MTO is a query that returns the components and pipe pieces for a pipe spool. The default
order of the list is in hierarchical sequence order.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:29
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.13.2 Assembly Activities
Array of activities for each of the components in the pipe spool.
Flanges
Activity object definition for orienting a flange component.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Component activity relates to
Offset Angle
REAL
Offset angle
(Rotation)
of
flange
from
reference
plane
Reference Plane DBREF
Component
Component used to define reference plane
Plane Direction
Direction of the plane acting through the reference
component
DIRECTION
Branch Pieces
Activity object definition for defining branch connection, tee, olet, etc. to another branch.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Component activity relates to.
Offset Angle
REAL
Offset angle of connection from reference plane
(Turn)
Rotation Angle
REAL
Only relevant for straight branch pieces ending in a
flanged connection
The reference plane for the flange rotation is
defined by the branch piece and the main pipe
Inclination Angle
REAL
The inclination is the angle between the branch
piece and the main pipe measured in the direction
towards the reference component
Branch
Connection
ENUM
Type of connection of branch piece to main pipe
Reference Plane DBREF
Component
Component used to define reference plane
Plane Direction
Direction of the plane acting through the reference
component
DIRECTION
Elbow
Activity object definition for defining elbow component.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Component activity relates to
Offset Angle
REAL
Offset angle with respect to reference plane (Turn)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:30
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Attribute
Type
Description
Reference Plane DBREF
Component
Component used to define reference plane
Plane Direction
Direction of the plane acting through the reference
component
DIRECTION
Mitre (Single Cut)
Activity object definition for defining elbow component.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Component activity relates to
Offset Angle
REAL
Offset angle with respect to reference plane (Turn)
Cut Angle
REAL
Angle pipe is cut (Inclination)
Reference Plane DBREF
Component
Component used to define reference plane
Plane Direction
Direction of the plane acting through the reference
component
DIRECTION
Cut
Activity object definition for defining cut at start/end of a pipe piece.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Pipe piece activity relates to
End
ENUM
End cut is related to (Inclination)
Final Length
REAL
Final cut length from reference component
Reference
Component
DBREF
Reference component final cut is measured from
Split
Activity object definition for defining split in a pipe piece.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Pipe piece activity relates to
Feed Excess
REAL
Excess removed from feed tube following reference
component
Reference
Component
DBREF
Reference component preceding feed excess is
removed from
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:31
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
Thread
Activity object definition for defining threading at start/end of a pipe piece.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Pipe piece activity relates to
End
ENUM
End threading is related to (Inclination)
Thread Length
REAL
Length of threading required
Thread
?
Threading information
Insert
Activity object definition for defining inserts at the end of a pipe piece.
Attribute
Type
Description
Component
DBREF
Pipe piece activity relates to
Insert Length
REAL
Length of insertion into following pipe piece
13.13.3 Bending Table
Managed by attributes and pseudo attributes of pipe piece.
Attribute
Type
Description
Pipe Piece
DBREF
Pipe piece bending table relates to
Bending Machine
DBREF
Bending machine reference
Clutch arrive tube
BOOLEAN
True if the bending machine clutches the arrive
tube
Check Sum
?
NOT IMPLEMENTED
Activities
Bend
Array
Activity Array with bending activities for the pipe piece
Bending Activity
Managed by attributes and pseudo attributes of pipe piece.
Attribute
Type
Description
Feed
REAL
Feed activity value
Rotate
REAL
Rotation activity value
Bend
REAL
Bend activity value
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:32
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
13.13.4 Welding Table
Managed by attributes and pseudo attributes of pipe piece.
Attribute
Type
Description
Pipe Piece
DBREF
Pipe piece welding table relates to
Welding Machine
DBREF
Welding machine reference
Arrive Flange
DBREF
Flange at arrive of pipe piece
Arrive
Welded
Flange Boolean
Leave Flange
Leave
Welded
True if welding machine set, arrive flange can be
welded and arrive flange is pre-welded
DBREF
Flange at leave of pipe piece
Flange Boolean
Angle
True if welding machine set, leave flange can be
welded and leave flange is pre-welded
Real
Angle between the arrive flange and leave flange
where both pre-welded
13.13.5 Spool Extents/End Point
Information derived from Pipe Spool to determine the positions at the start and end of the
first branch/section of branch of a spool:
Start equates to APOS of PSSRFA[1]
End equates to LPOS of PSERFA[1]
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:33
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipework Spooling
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
13:34
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14
Production Checks
PDMS allows the user to check pipe pieces and pipe spools for production readiness
against welding machines, bending machines, pipe cut lengths on drawings and reports,
and defined stock-lengths of tubing.
•
Production checks run against available stock length and fabrication machines.
•
Fabrication machines are currently limited to bending and auto welding.
For more information about the production checks and the machines that carry them out,
refer to Fabrication Machine.
Note: Pipe fabrication functionality is the default, use the environmental variable
PRODUCTIONCHECKSENABLED (located in the evars.bat file) to enable or disable
production checks as Production Checks and Pipe Fabrication are incompatible.
14.1
Pipe Piece
A pipe-piece is the lowest level of fabricated item in the pipe. It relates to a continuous piece
of pipe tube that can be fabricated from stock material.
The pipe piece holds references to the components at the start and end of the piece. The
system derives pipe-pieces: users cannot create or delete them.
14.2
Pipe Spool
A pipe spool is a prefabricated part of a pipe or branch, often welded together in a workshop
before being sent to be fitted on-site. Pipe spools typically comprise a bent pipe with welded
flanges at each end, but they can also be more complicated fabrications with branches,
reducers, valves, and other components. PDMS does not include gaskets in the spool.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
The system derives spools: users cannot create or delete them.
14.3
Pipe Production Checks
All the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with the production checks of a
pipe piece and piper spool are initiated from a central Pipe Production Checks window
which acts as a task hub.
Depending on selections made in the Pipe Production Checks window, the user will be
presented with further windows prompting for user input. After inputting information in these
windows the user will always be returned to the Pipe Production Checks window allowing
the workflow to continue.
To check pipe spools for production readiness, the user needs to be in the DESIGN module
and running the Pipework application and perform a pipe production check. Select Utilities
> Production Checks from the main menu bar to display the Pipe Production Checks
window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
A pipe production check can only be performed on pipe for which the user has already
created a spool and cannot be performed at the current position in the database hierarchy.
The user will receive a message summarising the problem, for the example in the following
window a message explains that the element the user is attempting to perform a production
check on must be a pipe element or a branch or component element that resides below a
pipe element:
Before the Pipe Production Checks can be carried out, the parameters governing the check
must be setup, for more information, refer to Setup Production Checks.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.4
Setup Production Checks
Production Checks are initiated by first setting the checks to suits the projects and users
requirements. When running pipe production checks against pipe spools, the checks are
governed by the default fabrication and bending machines and tube stock lengths defined
by the user from the Setup Production Checks part of the Pipe Production Checks
window. Depending on the selections made from the Setup Production Checks part of the
Pipe Production Checks window will present the user with a different set of options.
14.4.1
Default Fabrication Machines
The user must first select the default fabrication and bending machines to use in production
checks, click Select Default Fabrication Machines. The Default Fabrication Machines
pane is populated with a list of the available drafted fabrication machines.
Select the checkbox for the default fabrication machine to use when the checks are run
against the selected pipe spool, click Apply.
Click Back to discard any inputs.
If a pipe-piece does not have a default fabrication and bending machine associated with it
when the production checks run, the software checks the pipe-piece against all machines
selected in the default machine list to identify and assign default fabrication machines.
14.4.2
Define Auto-Resolve Preferences
Auto-Resolve Preferences are the excesses (feed and end) needed as a result of a check
against and production from the default bending machine.
Once the default fabrication and bending machine has been selected the user must now
define the auto-resolve preferences. To define the Auto-Resolve References, click Define
Auto-Resolve Preferences. The Auto Resolve Preferences window is displayed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Select the Include End Excess checkbox, to add a surplus to the end of the pipe-piece,
during production.
Select the Include Feed Excess checkbox, to add a surplus during the feeding of the pipepiece through the bending machine, when in production.
Click Apply, to save the inputs and return to the Pipe Production window or Cancel to
discard any inputs.
14.4.3
Define Auto-Naming Preferences
Auto-naming enables the automatic naming of new spools when they are generated. When
selected, each newly created spool will be automatically named using the auto-naming
rules. If auto-naming is turned off then spools will be given default names (Spool1, Spool2).
The status of the Auto-Naming Preferences is displayed in the Setup Production Checks
part of the window. To define auto-naming preferences click Define Auto-Naming
Preferences.
The Auto Naming Preferences pane is displayed:
The user must select to use Auto Naming Rules or Define Naming Rules:
To use auto-naming, select the Use Auto Naming Rules checkbox and click Apply.
Click Back to discard any inputs and close the Auto Naming Preferences pane. The user
is returned to the Setup Production Checks part of the Pipe Production Checks window.
The user can define the Naming Rules to specify the element types to which automatic
naming applies and to set up rules which determine the names to be allocated.make it
easier to give elements logical names. To define Naming Rules, select Define Naming
Rules. For more information on Automatic Naming Rules, refer to Catalogues and
Specifications User Guide.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.4.4
Stock Length
Pipe Stock Lengths are defined for each specification and bore in the Pipe Data Tables in
PARAGON. They cannot be changed from Design/Production Checks.
The bending machine itself has a user-modifiable attribute MaxLP which is referred to as
'maximum material length' in the Production Checks GUI to avoid the confusion with Pipe
Stock Length. It is a limit on the length of tube the machine can handle.
These two types of attributes are independent of each other.
14.4.5
Generating Spools
After setting up the Production Checks, the user can generate spools so that the Pipework
application can carry out the pipe production checks on the generated spools.
Pipe Production Checks can only be carried out on pipe spools, to generate the spools for
make sure the pipe is the currently selected element in the Design Explorer and select
Generate Spools on the Pipe Production Checks window.
The Pipework Application generates the pipe spools for the CE and populates the Pipe
Spools list. The Pipe Spools part of the Pipe Production Checks window displays a list of
the Pipe Spools for the currently selected pipe and their Production Status.
Once the pipe spools have been generated, the Pipe Production Checks can now be carried
out. For more information, refer to Run a Production Check.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.4.6
Run a Production Check
Pipe Production Checks examine the pipe spools for production readiness, production
checks can only be carried out on a single spool at a time. Production checks run using the
fabrication machines associated with the individual pipe-pieces of the spool. If no machines
are associated with a pipe-piece, then the software checks it against all machines defined in
the default machine list.
Once the pipe spools have been generated, the user can use the Pipe Production Checks
window to view, remove and validate different aspects of the production check on the pipe
and its spools:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
The Pipe Production Checks window acts a task hub for the Pipe Production Checks,
depending on the selections made, the user will be presented with further windows.
Pipe Tasks
The user can validate a pipe, view production information for the pipe and remove machine
information.
Validate Pipe
Runs the production checks against the entire pipe. The
checks run for each spool in the pipe that requires
validating.
View Production
Information
Displays the production information currently associated
with each pipe spool and pipe-piece.
Remove Machine Info
Removes machine fabrication information for all pipe spools
and pipe-pieces in the pipe.
Spool Tasks
The user can validate a spool, view the production data for the spool and remove machine
information.
Validate Spool
Runs the production checks against the selected spool.
View Production
Information
Displays the production information currently associated
with the spool and the pipe-pieces it contains.
Remove Machine Info
Removes machine fabrication information for the selected
spool.
Navigation
The user can change the 3D graphical view to view the selected spool.
Setup Production Checks
For more information on Setup Production checks, refer to Setup Production Checks.
When the production checks have run the Pipe Spools part of the Pipe Production
Checks window is populated with the results for each spool:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Each pipe spool is examined by the Pipework Application and has one of three results:
Successful
Production checks were successful
Failed
Some part of the production check failed
Valid for production
Spool had already been validated so was not rechecked
The Production Results part of the Pipe Production Checks window displays the results
for each pipe-piece of the selected spool. A list of pipe-pieces shows the production check
results per piece, and each piece also has one of the three states above associated with it.
By selecting a pipe-piece from the Pipe Production Checks window, the detailed results of
the check below the pipe-piece list are displayed in the Detailed Result part of the Pipe
Production Checks window. The information displayed in this part of the Pipe Production
Checks window depends on the results of the check. Some examples of different results
follow.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Successful Check with no Modifications
The check has succeeded against both bending- and welding-machines, if these machines
were required, and the pipe-piece did not have to be modified.
The Detailed Results part of the Pipe Production Checks window displays which, if any,
bending machine was used and which flanges, if any, can be pre-welded. In the example
below, you can see no bending was required, and the leave flange can be machine-welded
by WELDING-MACHINE-1.
Successful Check with Modifications
The check succeeded against both bending and welding-machines, and some excesses
were needed to make the pipe-piece pass the checks.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
As well as the bending and welding machine information there is a list of excesses the pipe
required. Bm1 is suitable for bending the tube, no flanges can be pre-welded, and both the
arrive and the leave of the tube required excesses. Click Arrive of Tube or Leave of Tube,
the excess is displayed on the pipe piece in the 3D graphical view, where it applies to the
pipe-piece:
Failed Check with Modifications Required
If the pipe-piece requires excesses to pass the checks but the user will have to set up the
auto resolve preferences not to include excess automatically, then the check will fail. In this
case the results display the excess required. The user can accept these excesses to make
the pipe-piece pass the checks.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
The user can also set the pipe to be manually bent and so ignore bending checks.
Non Resolvable Failure
The pipe-piece may fail the production checks for a more serious reason. For example, it
may not be possible to find a bending machine that can handle the pipe tubing the pipepiece uses.
The Detailed Results part of the Pipe Production Checks window displays the system
cannot resolve the failure by adding excess. To overcome this, the user can set the pipepiece to be manually bent:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Length Check Failure
If the pipe-piece length exceeds the pipe stock length for this specification as defined in the
Pipe Data Table, this is displayed in the Detailed Results part of the Pipe Production
Checks window:
If the pipe piece length is greater than the maximum length of pipe MaxLP of the Bending
Machine, this is displayed to the user:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Notes:
1. The pipe stock length can be changed in the respective Pipe Data Table in Paragon.
2. The maximum length of pipe MaxLP is a user-modifiable attribute of the Bending
Machine.
These two types of parameters are independent of each other. The GUI refers to the
maximum length of pipe as 'maximum material length', to avoid confusion.
Expanding Machine Results
The user can expand the bending machine and welding machine results in the Detailed
Results part of the Pipe Production Checks window, to display more information. If there
is more information to view then the Expand icon appears by the Bending Machine Result
title. Clicking the title or the icon expands the bending machine results.
Modify Production Information
The user can also modify the production information applied to the pipe-piece. Click Modify
Production Information… to display the required results.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Use this part of the Pipe Production Checks window to change the bending or welding
machines and modify the end excesses or apply minimum feed to a leg.
Change or Assign a Machine
To change or assign a bending or welding machine click the appropriate link. If no machine
is associated with the pipe-piece then Change bending machine… will read Assign
Bending machine….
If the tube is straight then there are no bending machine options. If there are no pre-welded
flanges then there are no welding machine options.
Select the required machine then click Apply. To cancel any changes and go back to the
previous window, click Back.
After selecting a new machine click Accept Changes at the bottom of the window to accept
the changes.
Edit End Excess
To edit the end excess first expand the collapsible panel by clicking End Excess.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
You can add your own end-excess by entering a value in the User Defined text box.
Click Accept Changes to accept the new value.
Apply a Minimum Feed to a Leg
To view the feed excesses applied to a leg between two bends, click Feed Excess to
expand collapsible panel.
For each leg there is an editable text box in which you can enter a minimum feed value for
the leg. If you enter a new minimum feed value for the leg then the system recalculates the
feed excess the next time it checks the pipe-piece.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Revalidate the Pipe Piece
After changing the production information the user can revalidate the pipe-piece by clicking
Revalidate Pipe Piece. A production check which runs on the pipe-piece with the new
values.
Finish Viewing Results
To finish viewing the results of the production checks click Finish Viewing Results to return
to the top level of the window.
View Production Information
The user can view the production information assigned to pipe-pieces of a spool without
having to go through a production check.
To do this click View Production Information for either the pipe or a spool. This displays a
view of the production information assigned to each pipe-piece.
Remove Machine Information
To remove all machine information associated with a pipe spool or all the spools on a pipe
click Remove Machine Info for either the pipe or the selected spool:
14.5
Individual Renaming
Individual spools can be renamed by right-clicking on the spool to be renamed and selecting
Rename Spool from the shortcut menu to display the Name window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
In the Name box, input the new name for the spool element.
The number of spools that can be renamed can be changed by selecting from a choice of
options in the drop-down list:
•
Only - (default) renames a single spool.
•
Re-name all - renames all the spools.
•
Un-name - removes any changes made.
Click CE to select another spool.
Click Apply to rename spool or Dismiss to discard any changes and close the Name
window.
14.5.1
Group Renaming
All spools for a specified pipe can be renamed by right-clicking on any spool and selecting
Rename All from the short cut menu.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
If auto-naming is turned on then spools names will be set using auto-naming rules,
otherwise spool names will be set to default.
If auto-naming is turned off, an error message is displayed:
Click OK to rename spool with default names or Cancel to close the error message window.
14.6
Automatic Flange Alignment
For pipe-pieces and pipe spools that have been set up to be machine-welded, the system
ensures it correctly orientates the piping model so flange-holes and spools align when
assembled.
The system checks flange-alignment as part of the pipe-checking and Datacon functionality.
Refer to Production Checks for further information.
14.7
Fabrication Machine
The system can check pipe pieces for production readiness against bending machines,
welding machines and the defined stock length of tubing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Production test requests are made to a Fabrication Machine Manager controlling the
fabrication machines. Information about the welding/bending machine operation and their
corresponding activity tables can be obtained from the Manager.
14.7.1
Methods
The following table is populated with the methods used by the fabrication machine manager:
Name
Result
Purpose
SetMaximumMaterialLength NO RESULT
(REAL length)
Sets the maximum material length.
GetMaximumMaterialLength REAL
( )
Gets the maximum material length.
SetBendingMachine(DBREF
bendingMachine)
NO RESULT
Sets the current bending machine.
Future fabrication tests will use this
bending machine.
GetBendingMachine( )
DBREF
Gets the current bending machine.
SetWeldingMachine(DBREF
weldingMachine)
NO RESULT
Sets the current welding machine.
Future fabrication tests will use this
welding machine.
GetWeldingMachine( )
DBREF
Gets the current welding machine.
ValidatePipePiece(DBREF
pipePiece)
BOOLEAN
Checks if the given pipe piece can
be fabricated by the current
combination of bending / welding
machines.
Information
about
fabrication for the bending/welding
machine can be obtained by
requesting
the
corresponding
bending/welding result objects.
SetAddExcessBetweenBends NO RESULT
(BOOLEAN add)
Tells the fabrication machine
manager if excesses between
bends can be added to the pipe
piece in order to satisfy bending
machine fabrication requirements.
GetAddExcessBetweenBends BOOLEAN
( )
Gets the current add
between bends setting.
excess
SetAddEndExcess(BOOLEAN
add)
NO RESULT
Tells the fabrication machine
manager if excesses at the ends of
the pipe piece can be added in
order to satisfy bending machine
fabrication requirements.
GetAddEndExcess( )
BOOLEAN
Gets the current add end excess
setting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Name
Result
Purpose
SetChangeFlangeToManual( NO RESULT
BOOLEAN change)
Tells the fabrication machine
manager if flanges at the end of the
pipe piece can be changed to
manually welded in order to be able
to fabricate the pipe piece.
GetChangeFlangeToManual( BOOLEAN
)
Gets the current change flange to
manual setting.
SetCheckStockLength(BOOL NO RESULT
EAN check)
Tells the fabrication machine
manager if the current stock length
must be checked during fabrication.
GetCheckStockLength( )
BOOLEAN
Gets the current check stock length
setting.
SetFirstFeedNegative
(BOOLEAN firstNegative)
NO RESULT
The first feed in the bending
machine will be negative (the pipe
is inserted into the bending
machine)
GetFirstFeedNegative ( ) BOOLEAN
Gets
the
FirstFeedNegative
setting of the fabrication machine
manager.
GetBendingMachineResult( BENDINGMA Gets a BendingMachineResult
)
CHINERESU object with information about the
LT
bending machine
fabrication test.
for
the
last
GetWeldingMachineResult( WELDINGMA Gets a WeldingMachineResult
)
CHINERESU object with information about the
LT
SetClutchEndPriority(STR NO RESULT
ING priority)
welding machine
fabrication test.
for
the
last
Informs the fabrication machine
manager about which end should
be inserted in the bending machine
clutch. Priority can take the
following values:
‘FLANGED’
‘NONFLANGED’
‘NOPREFERENCE’
GetClutchEndPriority( )
STRING
Gets the current clutch end priority.
‘FLANGED’,
‘NONFLANG
ED’,
‘NOPREFER
ENCE’
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:21
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Name
Result
SetMaterialStretchConfig NO RESULT
(STRING config)
Purpose
Sets the stretching parameters of
the bending machine for the
following fabrication tests. Config
can take the values:
‘SYSTEMDEFAULT’
‘MACHINE’
‘MATERIAL’
‘NOSTRETCH’
GetMaterialStretchConfig STRING
( )
Gets the current material stretch
configuration.
BendingMachineAcceptsPip BOOLEAN
ePiece(DBREF pipePiece)
Quick check to establish if the
current bending machine accepts
the given pipe piece.
WeldingMachineAcceptsPip BOOLEAN
ePiece(DBREF pipePiece)
Quick check to establish if the
current welding machine accepts
the given pipe piece.
“SYSTEMDE
FAULT”,
“MACHINE”,
“MATERIAL”,
“NOSTRETC
H”
14.7.2
BendingMachineResult
The following table is populated with the bending machine results used by the fabrication
machine manager:
Name
Result
Purpose
BendingMachine( )
DBREF
Bending machine used
PipePiece( )
DBREF
Pipe piece being checked
Pass( )
BOOLEAN
Whether pipe piece has passed
bending machine checks
ValidMaterial( )
BOOLEAN
The Bending Machine can deal
with the pipe piece material.
ValidOD( )
BOOLEAN
The Bending Machine can deal
with the pipe piece OD.
ValidWallThickness( )
BOOLEAN
The Bending Machine can deal
with the pipe piece wall thickness.
ValidInitialFeedLength(
)
BOOLEAN
First leg doesn’t excess the initial
feed of the bending machine
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:22
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
Name
Result
Purpose
ValidBendRadius( )
BOOLEAN
The Bending Machine can deal
with the bend radius of the pipe
piece.
AllBendsSameRadius( )
BOOLEAN
All the bends in the pipe piece have
the same radius.
WithinCollisionPlanes( ) BOOLEAN
The pipe piece does not collide
with the Bending Machine collision
planes.
FailureIsResolvable( )
BOOLEAN
Modifications
to
pipe
piece
definition is required to pass the
bending machine checks
PipePieceStartExcess( )
REAL
Start excess required.
PipePieceEndExcess( )
REAL
End excess required.
PipePieceFeedExcess( )
REAL
ARRAY
Array of feed excesses required.
PipePieceStart
FlangeManuallyWelded( )
BOOLEAN
Start flange required to be manually
welded.
PipePieceEndFlangeManual BOOLEAN
lyWelded( )
End flange required to be manually
welded.
PipePieceCutLength( )
REAL
PipePieceFinishedLength( REAL
)
As above,
removed.
material
but
with
before
excesses
EndsExcessPassed( )
BOOLEAN
Check against
change in state.
preference
for
FeedExcessPassed( )
BOOLEAN
Check against
change in state.
preference
for
FlangeModifiedPassed( )
BOOLEAN
Check against
change in state.
preference
for
BendingDirectionForward( BOOLEAN
)
14.7.3
Length
of
fabrication.
Bend in direction of flow.
WeldingMachineResult
The following table is populated with the welding machine results used by the fabrication
machine manager:
Name
Result
Purpose
Welding machine( )
DBREF
Welding machine used
PipePiece( )
DBREF
Pipe piece being checked
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:23
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.7.4
Pass( )
BOOLEAN
Whether pipe piece has passed
welding machine checks
ValidMaterial( )
BOOLEAN
The Welding Machine can deal
with the pipe piece material.
ValidOD( )
BOOLEAN
The Welding Machine can deal
with the pipe piece OD.
ValidMinimumLength( )
BOOLEAN
The length of the pipe piece is
greater than the minimum length
of the welding machine.
ValidMaximumLength( )
BOOLEAN
The length of the pipe piece is
smaller than the maximum length
of the welding machine.
ValidStartFlangeGroup( )
BOOLEAN
The flange at the start of the pipe
piece is accepted by the welding
machine.
ValidEndFlangeGroup( )
BOOLEAN
The flange at the end of the pipe
piece is accepted by the welding
machine.
MaxWeldedFlanges( )
REAL
Maximum number of welded
flanges the can be handled by
welding machine
BendingTable
The following table is populated with the information for a bending table used by the
fabrication machine manager:
Name
Result
Purpose
PipePiece( )
DBREF
Pipe piece bending table relates
to
BendingMachine( )
DBREF
Bending machine reference
ClutchArriveTube( )
BOOLEAN
True if the bending machine
clutches the arrive tube
CheckSum( )
?
NOT IMPLEMENTED
Activities( )
BENDACTIVI
TY ARRAY
Array with bending activities for
the pipe piece
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:24
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.7.5
BendActivity
The following table is populated with the information for a bending activity used by the
fabrication machine manager:
14.7.6
Name
Result
Purpose
Feed( )
REAL
Feed activity value
Rotate( )
REAL
Rotation activity value
Bend( )
REAL
Bend activity value
WeldingTable
The following table is populated with the information for a welding table used by the
fabrication machine manager:
14.8
Name
Result
Purpose
PipePiece( )
DBREF
Pipe piece welding table relates to
WeldingMachine( )
DBREF
Welding machine reference
ArriveFlange( )
DBREF
Flange at arrive of pipe piece
ArriveFlangeWelded( )
BOOLEAN
True if welding machine set, arrive
flange can be welded and arrive
flange is pre-welded
LeaveFlange( )
DBREF
Flange at leave of pipe piece
LeaveFlangeWelded( )
BOOLEAN
True if welding machine set, leave
flange can be welded and leave
flange is pre-welded
Angle( )
REAL
Angle between the arrive flange
and leave flange where both prewelded
Database Support
The database ddl supports the following new objects to support fabrication machines.
14.8.1
FMWL - Fabrication Machine World Top Level Element
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
DESC
Description
text
unset
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:25
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.8.2
FMGRP - Fabrication Machine Group
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
14.8.3
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
PURP
Purpose
text
unset
DESC
Description
text
unset
FUNC
Function
text
unset
FMBEND - Fabrication Machine - Bending
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
14.8.4
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
STFP
Constant Stretch Factor
real
1.0
STFC
Proportional Stretch Factor
real
0.0
MAXLP
Maximum Length of Pipe
real
6000.0
FMBPLN - Fabrication Machine - Bending - Plane
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
14.8.5
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
MINPLN
Plane Minimum Point
real[3]
{0.0, 0.0, 0.0}
MAXPLN
Plane Maximum Point
real[3]
{0.0, 0.0, 0.0}
FMBDIM - Fabrication Machine - Bending - Dimension
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
OD
Outside Diameter
real
0.0
WTHICK
Wall Thickness
real
0.0
GRIP
Grip Measure
real
0.0
MLEF
Minimum Length Excluding real
Flanges
0.0
MLIF
Minimum
Flanges
0.0
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Length
14:26
Including real
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.8.6
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
FCMEAS
Flange Correction Measure
real
0.0
BRAD
Bend Radius
real
3.0
FMBSST - Fabrication Machine - Bending - Springback/Stretch Factor
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
14.8.7
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
OD
Outside Diameter
real
0.0
WTHICK
Wall Thickness
real
0.0
MATREF
Material reference
real
0.0
ANGSPA
Angle At 20 Degrees
real
20.0
ANGSPB
Angle At 120 Degrees
real
120.0
STFP
Constant Stretch Factor
real
1.0
STFC
Proportional Stretch Factor
real
0.0
FMWELD - Fabrication Machine - Welding
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
14.8.8
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
MINOD
Minimum Outside Diameter
real
0.0
MAXOD
Maximum Outside Diameter
real
0.0
MINLP
Minimum Length of Pipe
real
0.0
MAXLP
Maximum Length of Pipe
real
6000.0
FMWSK - Fabrication Machine Welding - SKEY
The following table is populated with information to support fabrication machines:
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
NAME
Name
name
unset
DESC
Description
text
unset
SKEY
Flange group skey
text
unset
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:27
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.9
Automatic Flange Alignment
This development allows piping components to be connected so that by default their Z
directions are aligned, which is particularly useful for ducting and other BOXI piping.
The functionality comprises the following:
14.9.1
•
An attribute on the different ppoint elements in the catalogue.
•
A set of pseudo attributes to allow it to be queried in the design.
•
An enhanced connect command to take account if set.
•
Datacon check.
New Attribute for PTCA, PTAX, PTMI, PTPOS
The following table is populated with information to support automatic flange alignment:
14.9.2
Attribute
Description
Type
Default
PZAXI
Z direction
Direction
unset
New Pseudo Attributes for Branch Members
All these pseudo attributes are valid for Branch members.
14.9.3
Attribute
Comment
PZDIR
Alignment direction for specified ppoint.
AZDIR
Alignment direction for arrive ppoint
LZDIR
Alignment direction for leave ppoint.
PQAANG
Angle between alignment direction for specified ppoint and adjacent
component.
AQAANG
Angle between alignment direction for arrive ppoint and previous
component.
LQAANG
Angle between alignment direction for leave ppoint and next
component.
Connection Command
The command syntax is unchanged.
However, it now uses valid alignment directions in place of a default orientation. It checks
that a PZAXI is set for the relevant ppoint of the current element and for the ppoint it is
connecting to.
If the element being connected to is a gasket or a weld and does not have a set PZAXI then
the ppoint of the next element is used instead. If there is either one or two unset alignment
directions then the connection command functions exactly as before.
Also if an orientation is specified as well such as CONNECT AND P3 IS UP then this
overrides the alignment direction.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:28
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
14.9.4
New Datacon Warning Messages
The following warnings are now generated. They are not output if the branch is badly
routed.
D850 BAD ARRIVE ALIGNMENT GEOMETRY, ANGLE IS 15
D850 BAD LEAVE ALIGNMENT GEOMETRY, ANGLE IS 45
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:29
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Production Checks
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
14:30
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
15
Pipe Sketches
Pipe Sketches can be produced automatically in Automatic Drawing Production (ADP) using
production-checked pipe-spool data from the Design application. The sketches include
dimensioned and scale drawings of a pipe spool along with tables of relevant manufacturing
data. Refer to the DRAFT User Guide for further information.
15.1
Drawing Template
Every Pipe Sketch drawing is based on a Template Drawing used as the basic definition of
the Pipe Sketch.
The Template Drawing contains views and layers like any other Draft Template drawing; for
other Drawing information the Template Drawing references a Backing Sheet.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
15.1.1
Backing Sheet
The Pipe Sketch references the Backing Sheet, which is generally user-defined.
It is a standard backing sheet containing the drawing title block, with drawing data displayed
via intelligent text e.g. #DATE<FR DRWG> and #:UDA_Name etc.
In addition to the standard title block, the backing sheet is used to identify and locate
‘TABLES’ that are to be used on the Pipe Sketch.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
These tables are identified by:
15.1.2
MaterialTakeOff
function ‘MTO’
SpPurpose
‘TABLE’
or
SpPurpose
‘CELLS
Bending Table
function ‘BENDING’
SpPurpose
‘TABLE’
or
SpPurpose
‘CELLS
Bending Activities
function ‘BENDINGA
SpPurpose
‘TABLE’
or
SpPurpose
‘CELLS
Welding
function ‘WELDING
SpPurpose
‘TABLE’
or
SpPurpose
‘CELLS
Assembly
function ‘ASSEMBLY
SpPurpose
‘TABLE’
or
SpPurpose
‘CELLS
End Points
function ‘ENDPOINT
SpPurpose
‘TABLE’
or
SpPurpose
‘CELLS
Tables
In database terms the Table is a NOTE of the Backing Sheet (BACK).
There are two notes required, one for the Table headings and one for the Table cells. Both
notes are positioned at the same point. For example:
BACK named /DRA/MAS/BACKS/PipeSketch/A4 SETST
NOTE named */ExampleTable function ‘ENDPOINT SpPurpose ‘TABLE’
NOTE named */ExampleCells function ‘ENDPOINT SpPurpose ‘CELLS’
The example displays a table defined on a backing sheet. Although this table is visible in the
view, it will in practice have its visibility flag (LVIS) set to false. The reason being that this
table is copied onto the Pipe Sketch Drawing then the cells of the table are populated with
data from the actual Pipe Spool.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
The example displays the table in situ on the final pipe Sketch Drawing.
MTO Tables
The displayed MTO/Material Take-off tables first on the backing sheet and then on the
finished drawing. On this type of table the ‘cells’ data need to be attributes of the Pipe Spool
elements. E.g. DTXR and MTXR attributes as used in the Description and Material columns.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
Bending Tables
The displayed Bending Tables are displayed first on the backing sheet and then on the
finished drawing.
Bending Activities Tables
The displayed Bending Activities Tables are displayed first on the backing sheet and then on
the finished drawing.
Automatic Welding Tables
The displayed Automatic Welding Tables are displayed first on the backing sheet and then
on the finished drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
Assembly Activities Tables
The displayed Assembly Activities Tables are displayed first on the backing sheet and then
on the finished drawing.
End Points Tables
The displayed End Points Tables are displayed first on the backing sheet and then on the
finished drawing.
15.1.3
Styles
All Drawing Styles and Representations are inherited from the template drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
These include the View Representations, text colours and font size for Labels and
Dimensions.
Example:
VIEW
Rrsf /DRA/PRJ/RERP/GEN/BASIC
LAYER
TSIZE 3mm
etc
15.1.4
Common Object
The system uses one object that does all the work to produce Pipe Sketch Drawings, (do
not have to use the form and graphics mode to produce a batch of drawings).
The common object is a global instance of a pipeSketches object called !!pipeSketch.
The Key Members:
Member
Type
Comment
!!pipeSketch.createIn
DBREF
Must be an existing Registry - REGI element
!!pipeSketch.selectedTem
plate
DBREF
Must be an existing Drawing - DRWG
element.
!!pipeSketch.pipeSpool
DBREF
Must the an existing Pipe Spool - PSPOOL
element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
Optional Members
Member
Type
Comment
!!pipeSketch.logFile
FILE
The Form or User must write and read this file.
!!pipeSketch..drawingPre
fix
STRING
Default is ‘DR’.
!!pipeSketch..sheetPrefix
STRING
Default is ‘S’.
Other Members set and used in the background by the system:
Member
Type
Comment
!!pipeSketch..type
STRING
Will always be ‘drawing’ or ‘drtmpl’.
!!pipeSketch..pipePieces
ARRAY
System records the Pipe Pieces of the Pipe
Spool.
!!pipeSketch..drawing
DBREF
System records the new drawing.
!!pipeSketch..sheet
DBREF
System records the new sheet.
!!pipeSketch..backingShe
et
DBREF
System records the backing sheet being used.
!!pipeSketch..mtoHeadin
gs
ARRAY
Array of strings read from backing sheet MTO
table.
!!pipeSketch..logData
ARRAY
Array of comment strings that user or form can
read)
An Example
!!pipeSketch.createIn
= object DBREF (‘/MyRegistry’)
!!pipeSketch.selectedTemplate
= object DBREF (‘/MyTemplateDrawing’)
!!pipeSketch.pipeSpool
= object DBREF (‘/MyPipeSpool’)
--Then to create the sketch
!!pipeSketch.apply()
15.1.5
Log Messages
To write any message to the Log Data from any PML function use:
!!pipeSketchesLog(‘Text of your choice’)
To clear the messages from the Log Data use:
!!pipeSketch.emptyLogData()
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
To write to the log file use:
!!pipeSketch.logFile
= object FILE(‘%PDMSUSER%/
pipeSketches.txt’)
!!pipeSketch.openLogFile()
!!pipeSketch.writeLogFile()
- This write the contents of .log
Data to the .logFile
!!pipeSketch.closeLogFile()
15.1.6
How to Define Tables
Under a Backing Sheet
BACK /ExampleBack SETST
Create NOTEs
NEW NOTE */---Table SETST
FUNC ‘---’ (‘--‘ can be MTO, BENDING, BENDINGA, WELDING, ENDPOINT or ASSEMBLY)
SpPurpose TABLE
Set the XYpos and usual attributes for text size colour etc.
Create and name TEXP and STRA elements under NOTE. In the example below there are
4 TEXP elements and 7 STRA elements (Shown in Black)
NEW NOTE */---Cells SETST
FUNC ‘---’ (‘--‘ can be MTO, BENDING, BENDINGA, WELDING, ENDPOINT or ASSEMBLY)
SpPurpose TABLE
Set the XYpos and usual attributes for text size colour etc.
Create and name TEXP and STRA elements under NOTE.
In the example below there are 3 TEXP elements and 1 STRA element (Shown in Red)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
15.1.7
Dimensions
Dimensions are controlled from the Template Drawing:
A VIEW will only be dimensioned if it has a LAYER with a PURPose of ‘DIMA’.
If this layer exists then the dimensions go into that layer.
The style of the dimension will be cascaded from the owning layer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
15.1.8
Tags
Tagging is controlled from the Template Drawing:
A VIEW will only be tagged if it has a LAYER with a PURPose of ‘LABA’.
If this layer exists then the tags will go into that layer.
The style of the tag will be cascaded from the owning layer, or taken from a symbol template
in the case of component tags.
A typical symbol may look like this:
To control how the components of the Pipe Spool are tagged.
Firstly:
A LAYER with PURPose of ‘LABA’
Must own a TASK element with a SpPurpose of ‘TAGDEF’,
Which owns 4 Task Parameter elements (TKPARA)
With FUNCtion equal to ‘TEMPLATE’, ‘OFFSET’, ‘TPEN’ and ‘FPEN’
And suitable TPVALUEs.
Example:
LAYER
TASK
TKPARA
FUNC ‘TEMPLATE’ TKPARA ‘/MySymbol’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘OFFSET’ TKPARA ’10 10’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘TPEN’ TKPARA ‘1’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘FPEN’ TKPARA ‘11’
When tagging views the system will create a Symbolic Label (SLAB) for each component,
using the attributes of the above task parameters.
Secondly:
A LAYER with PURPose of ‘LABA’
Must own a TASK element with a SpPurpose of 'ARRLAB'
Which owns 6 Task Parameter elements (TKPARA)
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
And specific FUNCtions and suitable TPVALUEs
Example:
LAYER
TASK
TKPARA
FUNC ‘Top Side’ TKPARA ‘On’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘Bottom Side’ TKPARA ‘Off’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘Left Side’ TKPARA ‘On’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘Right Side TKPARA ‘On’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘Margin’ TKPARA ‘5’
TKPARA
FUNC ‘Minimum Gap’ TKPARA ‘1’
When tagging views the system will now arrange the Label around the view, using the
attributes of the above task parameters.
15.1.9
Defaults
Users will generally have their own Sketch Templates for Pipe Sketches.
The very first time you display this form there will be a default AVEVA Template in the
Template field and a default log file name in the log file field.
When the form is applied the current setting of the Registry, Template and Log File are
written to a defaults file named %pdmsuser%/PipeSketches.pmldat
These values are used as the default next time the form is displayed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Sketches
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
15:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Preview Isometrics
16
Preview Isometrics
Preview isometric drawings of pipe systems and individual pipes can be viewed in the
application as though the isometrics had been produced in ISODRAFT. For enhanced
functionality, refer to ISODRAFT User Guide.
To view a preview isometric drawing of the currently selected element in the design
hierarchy. The user may find it useful to identify the pipe or pipe system to be previewed,
select Utilities > Show Pipe System, the CE is highlighted in the 3D graphical view:
16.1
Pipe Isometric
To view a preview isometric drawing of the pipe, select Utilities > Pipe Isometric to display
the Preview Isometric Drawing window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
16:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Preview Isometrics
The Preview Isometric Drawing window is populated with an annotated and dimensioned
isometric drawing of the pipe. A material list, title, pipe usage and explanation of the pipeline
symbols.
16.2
System Isometric
To view a preview isometric drawing of the pipe system, select Utilities > System
Isometric to display the Preview Isometric Drawing window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
16:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Preview Isometrics
The Preview Isometric Drawing window is populated with an annotated and dimensioned
isometric drawing of the CE (elements not currently displayed in the 3D graphical view will
also be added). A material list, title, pipe usage and explanation of the pipeline symbols.
If the currently selected element is a pipe with more than one branch, each branch is
displayed on a different sheet.
16.3
Isometric Drawing Contents
The content of each isometric drawing is calculated using complex algorithms to display all
of the required data in the available space. the algorithms are controlled by Standard iso
options selected before plotting the drawing.
The drawings are not to scale but are displayed so as best to show the information. Pipes
with no components attached to them, at the end of the spool drawing, may even be
abbreviated with just the annotation showing the length.l
Each piping component in the Preview Isometric Drawing window is annotated and a
symbol. The general format, annotations and dimensioning standard of the isometric
drawing is governed by user in ISODRAFT, refer to the ISODRAFT User Guide for further
information.
The annotation data shown is also controlled by the selection made in the SPOOLER
module, for more information refer to Number the Spool Drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
16:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Preview Isometrics
Piping component annotations in the Preview Isometric Drawing window are governed by
ISODRAFT. An example of some can be seen below:
Annotation
Key
Remarks
Dimension
Value shown in break in
dimensioning line, or directed
to line by arrow.
Spool Number
Number in a double box with Arrow points at the
the spool prefix.
component in the spool.
Part Number
Number in a rectangular box, Flanged components also show
along pipe or arrow pointing the Gasket (Gxx) and Bolt set
to component.
(Bxx) numbers.
Weld Number
Number in a circle
Joint Number
Number in a diamond, F = Flanged joint
prefixed by letter showing S = Screwed joint
C = Compression joint
type of joint.
first
Key for different types of weld is
shown on the plot.
For a full description of all the symbols used in the plots refer to the ISODRAFT User Guide.
16.4
Preview Isometric Drawing Window Toolbar
The toolbar gives quick access to all the tasks associated with the Preview Isometric
Drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
16:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Preview Isometrics
Depending on the selections made from Preview Isometric Drawing toolbar, the user will be
presented with further windows prompting for user input and options allowing for the
workflow to continue.
The toolbar for the Preview Isometric Drawing is automatically displayed when the Preview
Isometric Drawing window is displayed:
View the message file
Displays the Preview Isometric Messages window, where
the user can view message created during the generation of
the isometric drawing.
Save As
Displays a Browser window, the user can save the preview
isometric drawing as a plot file.
Save All
Displays a Browser window, the user can save all the
sheets of the preview isometric drawing as plot files.
Print Setup
Displays the printer settings.
Print Preview
Displays an on screen preview of the isometric.
Print
Prints the currently selected preview isometric drawing.
Print All
Prints all the sheets of the preview isometric drawing.
Highlight On/Off
Highlights all the elements displayed on the currently
previewed isometric drawing sheet in the 3D View. Clicking
the button again removes the highlighting.
If the elements are not currently displayed in the 3D View,
click this button twice. The first click will add the elements to
the 3D view, the second will highlight the elements.
Additional clicks will turn the highlighting on and off. N.B.
The highlighting will occur only if the Isometric Options file
uses the Hitfile option.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
16:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Preview Isometrics
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
16:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Work Area
17
Work Area
Most of the work area is common for all the design disciplines, but some areas with respect
to the Pipework application can be customised to suit a user.
17.1
Settings
The default pipe settings used to create the design model are taken from the current
defaults pipe specification, the name of which is displayed in the Default Specifications
window.
These default settings make sure the user is in compliance with company standards and a
high level of design consistency is maintained throughout the project.
Created items are generated using these defaults settings, any default setting can be
overwritten. All dimension (metric or imperial) must be compatible with the session units in
force, for more information, refer to Getting Started with Plant.
The current default pipe specification can be changed to use other default settings to
comply with company standards and national/international standards.
The default specification can be changed as per requirements, select Settings > Default
Spec, from the main menu bar to display the Default Specifications window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
17:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Work Area
Use the Default Specifications window to select the appropriate Piping specification and/
or Insulation and Tracing specifications.
17.2
Choose Options
Two options of the Pipework application can be preset, select Settings > Choose Options
from the main menu bar to display the Choose Options window:
17.2.1
Default Selection
Select the Default Selection checkbox to automatically select a specified (default)
component sub-type, each time a generic component is created. For example: Each new
flange will be a slip-on type.
Click to clear the Default Selection checkbox to ignore the default pipe specification and
display a list of available components of the correct bore irrespective of their specification.
The user can also specify what information is displayed on the list of available components,
refer to Selection Criteria.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
17:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Work Area
17.2.2
Selection Criteria
The user can specify what information is displayed on the list of available components, from
the Selection Criteria drop-down list:
17.2.3
Basic
Displays all the selector data
Text
Displays component and material descriptions
All
Displays the selector data and component and material descriptions
Auto Connect
Select the Auto Connect checkbox to automatically connect (position and orientate) the
new component.
Note: Connection will only occur if the connection types are compatible.
17.2.4
Auto Force Connect
Select the Auto Force Connect checkbox to force the connection of incompatible
connection types.
Note: If Auto Force Connect is used, when Data Consistency Checks are made, data
inconsistencies will be displayed.
17.3
Save and Restore Views
The user can save a 3D graphical view or restore a previously saved 3D graphical view.
From the 3D graphical view toolbar, select Save&Restore View. Refer to Save and Restore
Views for more information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
17:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Work Area
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
17:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18
Pipe Fabrication
The AVEVA PDMS suite allows the user to provide all of the required information to produce
pipes direct from the 3D model. Catalogue data provides all relevant fabrication information
for the component. Project and process relevant attributes are added at the design phase.
3D Engineering and Design systems must allow for the final steps of production to be
carried out without any additional effort and interfaces. Pipe Fabrication contains integrated
features to support the complete production process from design to fabrication and
assembly.
During pipe production various workflow and outsourcing scenarios are common. The
fabrication data provided by Pipe Fabrication allows for high flexibility for handling peaks in
the workload during the main outfitting phase. The mechanical prefabrication process
requires a significant amount of investment. The data provided by the Pipe Fabrication
allows for a smooth flow of information to the pipe fabrication vendors.
Pipe Fabrication can be tailored for specific needs using a set of functions for configuration
of the fabrication environment. The user can also perform production checks during the
design phase.
Pipe Fabrication offers a configurable reporting/drawing tool for pipe sketches containing
production information and an isometric view. Also all pipe production data can be extracted
in a neutral format for interfacing with other pipe production control systems. The NC Data is
provided in a machine independent neutral (XML) format. Post processing of this data to
machine dependent CNC data can be easily added as postprocessors for the different
vendor specific languages.
The pipe fabrication process consists of four stages:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:1
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
At the model stage, the user defines the fabrication related features. For example,
fabricated pipe ends, assignment of bending machines and design checks for fabrication.
Additional catalogue components are provided as part of Pipe Fabrication. Refer to
Modelling for further information.
Spooling is based on the design data and fabrication checks are performed as configured.
Only a successful fabrication check allows writing of the valid spool information to the
database. Refer to Spooling and Checks for further information.
Drawing production uses the design and fabrication information to create pipe sketches or
isometrics views. The material can be defined for shop or site and different types of
isometrics can be generated for fabrication and installation. Refer to Spooling and Checks
for further information.
Spool data can be published or only the NC relevant information for mechanical
prefabrication. Refer to Export Fabrication Data for further information.
Note: Pipe fabrication functionality is the default, use the environmental variable
PRODUCTIONCHECKSENABLED (located in the evars.bat file) to enable or disable
production checks as Production Checks and Pipe Fabrication are incompatible.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication to display the pipe fabrication functions.
The user can generate Pipe Spool Sketches from the Drafting module too.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:2
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18.1
Configuration
Pipe Fabrication allows the user to configure the following:
•
Fabrication Machine Manager. Refer to Fabrication Machine Manager for further
information.
•
Optimisation Criteria for Bending & Welding. Refer to Optimisation Criteria for Bending
and Welding for further information.
•
Galvanisation Tank Volume. Refer to Galvanisation Tank Volume for further
information.
•
Weld Gaps. Refer to Weld Gaps for further information.
•
Modelling Consistency Checks. Refer to Modelling Consistency Checks for further
information.
•
Threaded Ends. Refer to Threaded Ends for further information.
•
Defaults. Refer to Defaults for further information.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration to display the
configuration functions.
18.1.1
Fabrication Machine Manager
The Fabrication Machine Manager allows the user to define the attributes of the Pipe
Bending, Welding and Extrusion machines, with their physical limits, such as local collision
restrictions when the machine is in situ, maximum/minimum bore limits and material stretch/
spring back factors.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration > Fabrication Machine
Manager to display the Fabrication Machine Manager window. The Fabrication Machine
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:3
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Manager window differs depending on which Fabrication Machine Type is selected by the
user.
The Display Name/Description check box displays either the Name or the Description of
the fabrication element. The user can change this by selecting from the drop-down list.
When the box is left unchecked the Description displays.
When the box is checked the Name displays.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:4
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
To create a new Fabrication World, click Create Fabrication Machine World
display the Create Fabrication Machine World window.
to
The user must enter a Name and Description and click Apply.
Click the Copy check box to allow the user to copy an existing Fabrication Machine World
and enter the name to be copied in the text box.
To create a group of machines click, Create Fabrication Machine Group
Create Fabrication Machine Group window.
to display the
The user must enter a Name and Description and click Apply.
Select the Copy check box to allow the user to copy an existing Fabrication Machine Group
and enter the name to be copied in the text box.
Select a Fabrication machine type from the Machine Type drop-down list, the user can
select from Bending Machine, Welding Machine or Extrusion Machine.
Bending Machine
When Bending Machine is selected from the Machine Type drop-down list, the
Fabrication Machine Manager window displays the current Bending Machine.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:5
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can change the current bending machine by selecting from the Bending Machine
drop-down menu.
Click Create Bending Machine
to display the Create Bending Machine window
allowing the user to create a new Bending Machine.
The user must enter a Name and Description and click Apply.
Select the Copy check box to allow the user to copy an existing Bending Machine and enter
the name to be copied in the text box.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:6
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Other options available to the user on the Fabrication Machine Manager window are:
STF Proportional
Enter a proportional stretch factor for the bending machine.
STF Constant
Enter a constant stretch factor for the bending machine.
Bending Direction
Select from the drop-down list to define the bend direction, viewed
from the front of the bending machine.
Select Right to allow the bending machine to bend to the right.
Select Left to allow the bending machine to bend to the left.
Select Up to allow the bending machine to bend to the upwards.
Pipe Rotation
Select from the drop-down list to define the pipe rotation direction.
Select Clockwise to allow the bending machine to rotate the pipe
tube clockwise only.
Select Counter clockwise to allow the bending machine to rotate
the pipe tube counter clockwise only.
Select Both to allow the bending machine to rotate the pipe tube in
both directions.
Incremental
Springback
Select the check box to allow the user to define the springback for
an individual bending angle, for example, 5 degree steps.
Leave the check box unchecked and the Springback angle is
defined for 20deg and 120deg only. A linear interpolation is used
between these two values.
Right-click within the grids for Bending Dimensions, Collision Planes, Springback and
Stretch Factors to display a pop-up menu of available options associated with each tab.
Create
Creates a new row at the end of the table.
Copy
Creates a copy of the currently selected row.
Delete
Deletes the selected row.
Export to Excel
Exports the data to Excel.
Print Preview
Displays the dimension data in the Print Preview window.
Bending Dimensions
Click the Bending Dimensions tab to display a list of all the bending dimension data for the
selected element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:7
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The full list of Bending Dimension attribute descriptions is:
OD
Pipe outside Diameter.
WThickness
Pipe Wall Thickness.
PIP
Maximum insertion length for a pipe (plane end).
PIF
Maximum insertion length for a pipe with a pre-welded flange.
PIL
Maximum insertion length for a pipe with a pre-welded lap joint
stub end (LJSE).
MLF
Minimum length for the first straight. If no value is given, the Grip
length value is used.
Grip
Grip length of the bending machine indicating the minimum length
between bends.
MLL
Minimum length for the last straight.
BRatio
Bend radius ratio to outside diameter. By default, the PIR field is
populated when the Bratio value is modified.
PIR
Bend radius in mm. By default, the Bratio field is populated when
the PIR value is modified
Click
to display the Bending Machine Information window. The Bending Machine
Information window displays a graphical representation of the machine dimensions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:8
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Collision Planes
The user can create one or more collision planes for each Bending Machine. The Collision
Plane attributes are two maximum and two minimum positions. These planes are a basic
representation of the Bending Machine and its location in the workshop and are used by the
system as Clash planes when bending the pipe. The Bending machine feeds, rotates and
bends a pipe while the system makes sure it does not clash with any of the collision planes
during this process.
Click the Collision Planes tab to display a list of all the Collision Plane data for the selected
Bending Machine and a graphical representation of each selected Plane in a graphical view.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:9
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The list is a multi-select panel allowing several planes to display in context.
The axes, displayed only once, indicate the bending machine feed origin, from which all
other dimensions are taken.
The full list of Collision Plane attribute descriptions is:
X Min, Y Min, Z Min
Minimum Plane Position X, Y, Z
X Max, Y Max, Z Max
Maximum Plane Position X, Y, Z
Stretch Factor
Click the Stretch tab to display a list of all the stretch data for the selected Bending
Machine.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:10
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The full list of Stretch Factor attribute descriptions is:
OD
Pipe Outside Diameter.
WThickness
Pipe Wall thickness.
Matref
Material reference of tube.
STFProportional
Proportional stretch factor.
STFConstant
Constant stretch factor.
Springback
Click the Springback tab to display a list of all the springback data for the selected Bending
Machine.
If the Incremental Springback check box is left unchecked, the user can enter a constant
Springback angle for 20 and 120 degrees.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:11
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
If the Incremental Springback check box is checked, the user can define individual
Springback angles. The example below contains defined individual angles of 10 degrees.
The springback must be specified in degrees of over bending to reach the design angle after
bending. For bend simulation, the over-bended angle is used for stretch calculation and
collision tests.
The full list of Springback attribute descriptions are:
OD
Pipe Outside Diameter.
WThickness
Pipe Wall thickness.
Matref
Material reference of tube.
Bending Angle
Actual bending angle.
Springback Angle
Springbacked angle.
Welding Machine
When Welding Machine is selected from the Machine Type drop-down list, the
Fabrication Machine Manager window displays the current Welding Machine.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can change the current welding machine by selecting from the Welding Machine
drop-down menu.
Click Create Welding Machine
to display the Create Welding Machine window
allowing the user to create a new Welding Machine.
The user must enter a Name and Description and click Apply.
Select the Copy check box to allow the user to copy an existing Flange Welding Machine
and enter the name to be copied in the text box.
Click
to display the Welding Machine Information window. The Welding Machine
Information window displays a graphical representation of the welding parameters.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:13
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Weldable Flanges
Click the Weldable Flanges tab to display a list of defined SKey’s for flange components
that can be used on a welding machine.
Welding Dimensions
Click the Welding Dimensions tab to display a list of all the welding dimension data for the
welding machine.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:14
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The functionality of the Welding Dimensions tab allows the user to define the minimum
tube length between two welds.
The full list of Welding Dimension attribute descriptions is:
OD
Pipe Outside Diameter
WThickness
Pipe Wall Thickness
Matref
Material reference for pipe
WHN
Minimum distance (tube length) between two manual welds
WMN
Minimum distance (tube length) between two machine welds
WON
Minimum distance (tube length) between two orbital welds
Weld Connections
Click the Weld Connections tab to display a list of all the weld connection data for the
selected welding machine.
The connection types in the Weld Connections tab are used to check the minimum tube
length for welding, when weld elements are not used in the design.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:15
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
If weld elements are used in the design, the weld elements are used to check the minimum
tube length for welding, independent from connection type of the adjacent component.
Extrusion Machine
Select Extrusion Machine from the Machine Type drop-down list to display the current
Extrusion Machine in the Fabrication Machine Manager window. The user can select an
alternative Extrusion Machine from the Extrusion Machine drop-down list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:16
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Click
to display the Extrusion Machine Information window. The Extrusion Machine
Information window displays a graphical representation of the extrusion parameters.
Extrusion Dimensions
Click the Extrusion Dimensions tab to display a list of all the extrusion dimension data for
the selected extrusion machine.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:17
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The full list of Extrusion Dimension attribute descriptions is:
MOD
Pipe Outside Diameter of the main pipe.
WThickness
Pipe Wall thickness of the main pipe.
Matref
Material reference of the pipe.
BOD
Pipe Outside Diameter of branch.
EAB
Minimum distance from the centre of an extrusion to the next
bend.
EAK
Minimum distance from the centre of an extrusion to a plain pipe
end.
EAH
Height of the extrusion from the end of the main pipe.
EHE
Height of the extrusion machine from the floor (bottom of pipe).
ANT
Angle tolerance against the perpendicular direction of the main
pipe.
Minimum Distance between Extrusions
Click the Dist. between Extrusions tab to display a list of data that defines the minimum
distance between extrusions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:18
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The full list of Extrusion Dimension attribute descriptions is:
MOD
Pipe Outside Diameter of the main pipe.
BODA
Pipe Outside Diameter of the branch.
BODB
Pipe Outside Diameter of the neighbouring branch.
EAA
Minimum distance from the centre of an extrusion to the next
extrusion.
Report
To save a Bending Machine, Flange Welding Machine or Extrusion Machine report,
click Save Report to display the Save Report file browser.
The user must navigate to a directory where the report is to be saved and enter a Filename
in the text box.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:19
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18.1.2
Optimisation Criteria for Bending and Welding
During the bending, welding and extrusion checks, a custom configurable optimisation can
be applied to minimise costs or waste of material.
The data is stored in the Application Data World (APPLDW) element, the user must have
the correct access permissions to proceed.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration > Optimization
Criteria for Bending and Welding to display the Optimization Priorities window.
The user can assign an individual order for the optimisation, this is then considered by the
pipe fabrication check algorithm. The algorithm checks both bending directions. If both
bending directions are possible the optimisation criteria is used to decide the way the
welding and bending is done.
Minimize cut length
Select the result that has the shortest cut length.
Maximize
flanges
pre-welded
Select the result that has the greatest number of pre-welded
flanges.
Minimize pipe overhang
Select the result that has the longest machine insertion
length in the bending machine.
Single,
pre-welded
flanges not clutched
If only one flange can be welded before bending, this is
always left outside the machine. The other bending direction
is not considered.
Maximize
extrusions
Select the result that has the greatest number of machine
extrusions.
machine
Moves the currently selected optimisation priority up one
place.
Moves the currently selected optimisation priority down one
place.
Click Apply to modify the optimisation or Cancel to discard any inputs and close the
Optimization Priorities window.
Click OK to close the Optimization Priorities window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:20
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18.1.3
Galvanisation Tank Volume
The user can specify the dimensions of the galvanisation tanks available for the galvanising
of pipes.
The data is stored in an Application Data World (APPLDW) element, the user must have the
correct access permissions to proceed.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration > Galvanization Tank
Volume to display the Galvanization Tank Configuration window.
The user can modify the Name, Width, Depth and Height fields for the currently selected
galvanisation tank.
Refresh
Refreshes the Galvanization Tank Configuration window.
Create
Creates a new galvanisation tank, the user must enter a Name
and populate the Width, Depth and Height fields.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected galvanisation tank.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:21
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Click Dismiss to close the Galvanization Tank Configuration window.
18.1.4
Weld Gaps
The user can define the weld gap and cut length values for each piping specification.
The data is stored in an Application Data World (APPLDW) element, the user must have the
correct access permissions to proceed.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration > Weld Gap to display
the Weld Gap Config window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:22
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:23
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Weld Gap Table
Click in the Weld Gap Table tab to define the physical weld lengths for different piping
specifications.
Specification
Select a Specification from the drop-down list to display the
associated weld gap information.
Refresh
Refreshes the Weld Gap Table window.
The user can modify the currently selected Weld Gap value.
Click Apply to modify the weld gap, click Dismiss to close the Weld Gap Config window.
Weld Gap Options
Click the Weld Gap Options tab to define the weld handling information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:24
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can modify the values in the SHOP, FIELD and SITE fields to define the weld
specification for each weld type.
The Welds for Fitting to Fitting Connection part of the Weld Gap Options tab allows the
user to specify the weld type for fitting welds.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:25
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Do Not Create Welds
Welds are not created for Fitting to Fitting connections.
Welds with Zero Weld
Gap
Welds are created in the model with a gap length set to
zero.
Welds with Weld Gap
from Spec or Weld Gap
Table
Welds are created and have a physical length, the weld
fittings change position accordingly.
The Welds for Slip-On Flanges part of the Weld Gap Options tab allows the user to
specify the weld type for slip-on flanges.
Inner Weld
A weld is created on the inner surface of the connection.
Inner/Outer Welds
Welds are created on both the inner and outer surfaces of
the connection.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:26
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Click Apply to modify the weld gap options, click Dismiss to close the Weld Gap Table
window.
The gap weld values are used as a Design Parameter when welds are added to the 3D
model.
18.1.5
Modelling Consistency Checks
Pipes that are still being designed can be checked for fabrication readiness. Some of the
checks require configurable dimensions or minimum distances.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration > Modelling
Consistency Check to display the Consistency Check Configuration window.
In the above example the minimum distance between the branch and the next flange can be
defined for the main pipe.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:27
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
In the above example the minimum distance between the branch and the next flange can be
defined for the branch pipe.
Check Items
Select a Check Item from the drop-down list to display the
associated configurable dimensions or minimum distances.
New
Creates a new configurable dimension or minimum distance at the
bottom of the list, the user must populate the relevant fields.
Insert
Creates a new configurable dimension or minimum distance above
the currently selected row, the user must populate the relevant
fields.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected configurable dimension or minimum
distance.
Click Apply to modify the configurable dimensions or minimum distances.
Click OK to modify the configurable dimensions or minimum distances and close the
Consistency Check Configuration window.
Click Cancel to discard any inputs and close the Consistency Check Configuration
window.
18.1.6
Threaded Ends
Thread length information for threaded pipe ends can be modified by the user.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration > Threaded Ends to
display the Threaded Ends window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:28
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can modify the Connection, Description, Bore and Length fields for the
currently selected threaded end.
New
Creates a threaded end in the list of available threaded ends. The
user must populate the Connection, Description, Bore and
Length fields.
Copy
Copies the currently selected threaded end.
Delete
Deletes the currently selected threaded end.
Refresh
Refreshes the Threaded Ends window.
Up
Moves the currently selected threaded end up one place.
Down
Moves the currently selected threaded end down one place.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:29
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Click Apply to modify the threaded end or Cancel to discard any inputs and close the
Threaded Ends window.
Click OK to close the Threaded Ends window.
Register a New Thread Type
To register a new thread type, a new COCDES element must be created in Paragon. Refer
to Catalogues and Specifications User Guide for further information.
•
A new SCOM element with a Connection Type Description must be created in
Paragon. Alternatively the user can modify an existing SCOM element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:30
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The thread type must be referenced using the Thread Engagement Configuration
window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:31
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18.1.7
Defaults
Functionality is available to define the default values for pipe fabrication checks and other
behavioural aspects of Pipe Fabrication.
The data is stored in an Application Data World (APPLDW) element, the user must have the
correct access permissions to proceed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:32
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Configuration > Defaults to display
the Pipe Fabrication Defaults window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:33
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Default excess for loose
components
Defines the default excess added when a component is set
to loose.
Default excess for insert
connection
Defines the default excess length for an insert connection. A
description of how to correctly define an insert connection is
explained, refer to Non-standard Branch Connections for
further information.
Default
excess
surface connection
for
Defines the default excess length for a surface connection.
A description of how to correctly define a surface connection
is explained, refer to Non-standard Branch Connections for
further information.
Default
excess
saddle connection
for
Defines the default excess length for a saddle connection. A
description of how to correctly define a saddle connection is
explained, refer to Non-standard Branch Connections for
further information.
Default excess for boss
connection
Defines the default excess length for a boss connection. A
description of how to correctly define a boss connection is
explained, refer to Non-standard Branch Connections for
further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:34
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Default excess for mitre
connection
Defines the default excess length for a mitre connection.
Negative first feed
Select the check box for the first feed value to be a negative
value.
Leave the check box unchecked for the first feed value to be
a positive value.
XYZ Bending Table
Select the check box for the bending table to show x, y and
z coordinates for spool.
Leave the check box unchecked for the bending table to
show feed, rot and bend coordinates for spool.
Allow automated feed
excess
Select the check box to allow feed excess during fabrication
checks.
Allow automated end
excess
for
bending
machine
Select the check box to allow for an end excess, suitable for
the bending machine, to be added when required.
Allow automated end
excess for extrusion
machine
Select the check box to allow for an end excess, suitable for
the extrusion machine, to be added when required.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:35
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18.2
Always set spool type to
Shop
Select the check box for the spool type not to be overwritten
by the fabrication check functionality. It is always SHOP.
Show
"Modelling
consistency check not
passed"
on
Spool
Drawing
Select the check box to add a watermark to the spool
drawing, indicating the modelling consistency check status.
Modelling
Functionality is available for the user to assign a bending machine, define fabricated pipe
ends and carry out a modelling consistency check.
Pipe Routing using Bends via a Pipe Fabrication Machine
To use bends via Pipe Fabrication Machine, it is necessary to fulfil three criteria.
•
The branch, pipe or zone must have the BendMacReference attribute set. The
BendMacReference attribute must point to a valid Fabrication Machine World
(FMWL), Fabrication Machine Group (FMGRP) or Fabrication Machine (FMBEND)
which has a bending dimension (FMBDIM) matching exactly the tube outside diameter.
•
The piping specification must not have a predefined radius (RADI) value for a BEND
heading. AVEVA PDMS first tries to set the radius of the bend via the specification
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:36
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
selectors. If this is not available, AVEVA PDMS then checks that the
BendMacReference is available.
The example below shows a specification containing a predefined radius (RADI) value
for a BEND heading.
•
For the bend radius to be set via a Pipe Fabrication Machine, a variable angle / variable
radius Bend component (SCOM) must be defined in Paragon. The component
CompType attribute must be set to VAR.
The example below shows a SCOM element, the CompType attribute value is VAR.
AVEVA PDMS then attempts to find a valid radius for bends from the
BendMacReference attribute of the branch, pipe and zone sequentially in the
hierarchy.
Note: If no matching dimensions are found, the radius cannot be set, requiring the radius to
be set by the user.
18.2.1
Assign Bending Machine Reference
The user can define a default Bending Machine Reference for a pipe specification. The user
can then modify a Bending Machine Reference in the pipe structure.
Default Bending Machine Reference in Pipe Specification
The user can specify a default bending machine reference to each pipe specification using
Paragon.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:37
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Whenever a pipe is created, the BendMacReference attribute is populated with the default
value assigned to the piping specification.
Run Paragon and navigate to the pipe specification to which a default bending machine
reference is to be assigned.
Modify the Value field of the :PFBendMacReference attribute, the value must point to a
valid Fabrication Machine World (FMWL), Group (FMGRP) or Machine (FMBEND).
The bending machine reference must be located in the current MDB.
Run AVEVA PDMS and create a pipe with the modified pipe specification. Refer to Create
Pipe for further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:38
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
By default, the BendMacReference attribute is assigned with a valid default bending
machine reference from the pipe specification.
Modify Bending Machine Reference in Pipe Models
If a pipe bend Radius is too large and needs to be changed to a smaller bend radius for
design reasons, then the BendMacReference attribute for the zone, pipe or branch can be
modified to point to another Fabrication Machine World (FMWL), Group (FMGRP) or
Machine (FMBEND).
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Modelling > Assign Bending
Machine to display the Assign Bending Machine window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:39
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Click CE to identify the currently selected SITE, ZONE, PIPE or BRAN as the working
element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:40
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The list of elements displays the Name, element type and BendMacReference attribute
value of each element in the selected pipe structure. The user can select one or more
elements to modify.
Select the Highlight selected elements check box to highlight the selected table item in
the 3D graphical view.
Select FMWLD, FMGRP or FMBEND and click Apply to assign a new BendMacReference.
The Assign Bending Machine part of the Assign Bending Machine window allows the
user to assign a new bending machine and modify the bend radius of the selected element.
Assign Bending
Machine
Select an FMWLD, FMGRP or FMBEND from the drop-down list
to assign a BendMacReference attribute value to the selected
element.
Modify
Radius
Select the check box to modify the bend radius of the selected
element by default. Refer to Modify Bend Radius for further
information.
Bend
Tidy
Select the check box to tidy the BendMacReference attribute
value of the selected element by default. Refer to Tidy
BendMacReference Element for further information.
Click a Apply to assign a new bending machine and modify the bend radius of the selected
element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:41
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Modify Bend Radius
If the Modify Bend radius check box is selected, the bend radius of the selected element is
modified by default.
The example below shows the modified bend radius as part of a pipe structure.
Tidy BendMacReference Element
If the Tidy check box is selected, the BendMacReference attribute value of the selected
element is tidied by default. If the BendMacReference attribute value of a branch is the
same value as the owning pipe, the attribute value is removed from the branch.
The example below shows a pipe and branch with a duplicate BendMacReference attribute
value.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:42
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
When the Tidy check box is selected, the BendMacReference attribute value is removed
from the branch.
Details
The Details tab displays a list of change details for the pipework structure, calculated when
the user assigns the bending machine.
Errors
The Errors tab displays a list of errors for the pipework structure, calculated when the user
assigns the bending machine.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:43
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Bending Error Types
There are three different error types that can be checked for:
18.2.2
•
Not enough tube length before/after bend.
There is not enough straight tube length before or after a bend to change the bend
radius. An instance can occur when changing a bending machine reference that uses a
larger radius value.
The example below shows the effect of enlarging a bend radius on a tube.
•
Bending machine cannot handle the outside diameter
The new bending machine reference does not have a suitable bending dimension for
the outside diameter of the target pipe.
•
BendMacReference is not defined.
The BendMacReference attribute value is not defined for any of BRAN, PIPE and
ZONE elements in the pipework structure.
Fabricated Pipe Ends
Functionality is available for the user to define a plain, slanted or threaded pipe end.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Modelling > Fabricated Pipe Ends to
display the Fabricated Pipe Ends window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:44
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:45
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The Fabricated Pipe Ends window allows the user to define the pipe end by selecting a
pipe model and, if necessary, a reference plane. A Note can be specified to display on the
drawing.
Create
Plain/
Slanted Ends
Allows the user to specify the angle for the Plain or
Slanted End and display a Drawing Note.
Enter a value of 0 in the Slanted Angle field to define a
Plain End.
If required, enter a statement in the Drawing Note field,
the default is Plain End. The note displays on the drawing.
Click Create Plain/Slanted Ends. The user must select a
pipe end in the 3D graphical view.
Enter a value (greater than 0) in the Slanted Angle field to
define the angle of the Slanted End in degrees.
If required, enter a statement in the Drawing Note field, the
default is Trim pipe end to {deg}. The note displays on the
drawing.
Note: {deg} is replaced by the value of the Slanted Angle
value in the drawing.
Click Create Plain/Slanted Ends. The user must select a
pipe end in the 3D graphical view.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:46
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Create
Slanted
Ends
with
Reference Plane
Allows the user to create a slanted end by referencing a
plane.
Enter a value (greater than 0) in the Slanted Angle field to
define the angle of the Slanted End in degrees.
Enter a dimensional value in the Clearance field to define
the reference plane clearance.
If required, enter a statement in the Drawing Note field, the
default is Trim pipe end to {deg}. The note displays on the
drawing.
Note: {deg} is replaced by the value of the Slanted Angle
value in the drawing.
Click Create Slanted Ends with Reference Plane.
The user must select the plane to be used as the pipe end
cutting standard in the 3D graphical view.
Note:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:47
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Create
End
Thread
Allows the user to define a Threaded End.
Click Create Thread End. The user must select a pipe
end in the 3D graphical view.
Select a Thread Type from the Thread Type drop-down
list.
The user can configure the Thread Type, refer to
Threaded Ends for further information.
The Threaded End consists of four attributes:
•
Connection
•
Description
•
Bore of Picked Tube
•
Thread Length
The Thread information is shown on the drawing.
If a tube has thread information, the build length value
starts with '*' as prefix.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:48
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The assembly table contains the thread information.
18.2.3
Remove
Fabricated End
Deletes the Fabricated End (Slant or Thread). The user
must select a pipe end in the 3D graphical view.
Display
Fabricated End
Displays information for the created Fabricated End.
Modelling Consistency Check
A check can be carried out for pipe fabrication validity.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Modelling > Modelling Consistency
Check to display the Modelling Consistency Check window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:49
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The Modelling Consistency Check window allows the user to check a pipe fabrication,
view the check results and define the checks to be processed.
CE
Identifies the currently selected PIPE or BRAN as the working element.
Check
The Modelling Consistency Check is performed. The Check results
display as a coloured circle in the list of selected elements:
•
Green = passed
•
Amber = warning
•
Red = failed.
Stop
Cancels the Modelling Consistency Check currently being performed.
Results
The Results tab displays a description of the Modelling Consistency
Check Errors. The Check results display as a coloured circle in the
description:
Check CE
•
Green = passed
•
Amber = warning
•
Red = failed.
The Check CE tab displays a detailed error report for the currently
selected error description in the Results tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:50
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Options
The Options tab allows the user to define the checks to be included in
the Modelling Consistency Check.
Select the check box to include the check in the Modelling Consistency
Check. Clear the check box to omit the check from the Modelling
Consistency Check.
Click Apply to include only the selected check boxes in the Modelling
Consistency Check
When a Modelling Consistency Check has been performed, suggested error fixes display at
the bottom of the Modelling Consistency Check window.
The example below displays an error in the pipe indicating an invalid gasket. The suggested
fix is to remove the gasket from the from the pipe. The user can click Delete to remove the
invalid gasket.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:51
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The example below displays an error in the pipe indicating that Flange 2 and Flange 3 of the
branch are misaligned. The suggested fix is to align the flanges. The user can click Fix
Flange 2 of BRANCH/CHECK 4 to fix the alignment if Flange 2. The user can click Fix
Flange 3 of BRANCH/CHECK 4 to fix the alignment if Flange 3.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:52
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Additional Information for Saddle Components
The STUB-IN creation form can be used for SADDLE connections. A component which has
specific COMPTYPE (Component Type) can be used for SADDLE connection.
(The COMPTYPE should be SSAH or SSAT for SADDLE connection).
The user can query the COMPTYPE of the currently selected element. Enter q comptype
in the Command Window.
The user can query the CATREF of the currently selected element. Enter q catref in the
Command Window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:53
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can query the COMPTYPE of the currently selected element, in Paragon. Enter
q comptype in the Command Window.
18.3
Spooling and Checks
Pipe spool generation makes sure that all pipe spools include the necessary adjustments to
be suitable for production in an automatic and configurable manner. The following must be
considered:
•
Spooling must be part of design and pipe production.
•
The limit of pipe spool can be manually set.
•
Pipe production checks must be a one step application, available interactively via a
window and also in bulk mode for any list of pipe spools built from an explorer level.
For example, blocks and areas.
•
A spool can contain the following pipe components:
•
•
Welded Flanges
•
Lap joint flanges and stub ends
•
Caps
•
Bended pipes
•
Stub in branches, for example OLET or SET-ON TEE
•
Branch build via extrusion
•
Welds
•
Couplings
•
Any other manually welded components.
The bending logic addresses the complete pipe bending process information in a
comprehensive manner in order to make sure all design configurations can be
effectively produced. Machine welding and extrusions are tested in the same way.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:54
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
•
18.3.1
The following general errors can occur:
•
Minimum distances for bending not met
•
Collision with bottom, bending machine or other constraints defined by collision
planes
•
Height for extrusion machine does not allow extrusion
•
Minimum distances between welds not fulfilled.
•
All errors display an error message. The error message must be meaningful and
combined with visualisation. Guided changes are possible, for example, for additional
excesses or switches to manual bends.
•
The dimensions and constraints of fabrication machines are stored in configuration
tables in the Fabrication Machine World. The Fabrication Machine World can be
attached on a branch, a pipe or for a complete zone. A link can be set from the piping
specification to the Fabrication Machine World and is used during piping.
•
If flanges are welded before bending there is an impact on the bending process. The
bending machine must have a clutch, which can grip a flanged end, this influences the
maximum pipe length for bending.
•
During bending, welding and extrusion checks, a custom configurable optimisation can
be applied to minimise costs or waste of material. The user can assign an individual
order for the optimisation, this is then considered by the pipe fabrication check
algorithm. In each case the algorithm checks both bending directions, if both are
possible, the optimisation criteria is used to decide the welding and bending process.
•
The user can override fabrication checks and optimisation. For example, the user can
manually define a clutch piece or an explicit feed length. When a manual override is
entered, the bending check algorithm considers the override and only tests, for
example, the predefined working direction.
•
The most cost effective way of fabrication, is mechanical fabrication in a workshop. For
welding, bending and extruding, pipe production checks must be carried out to verify
machine specific dimensions. If this is not possible, the pipe length is estimated and cut
to an exact size at a later date.
•
Additional cuts are allowed:
•
A bended elbow can be cut down to the radius.
•
For flanges at the end of a straight pipe, with an extrusion, the pipe is oversized to
allow for extrusion and cut prior to flange welding.
•
Between two elbows, a feed excess must be added to allow for grip length. The
excess is cut to an exact size at a later date. The resulting two pieces are welded
together, leading to an additional weld.
Weld Handling
The Weld Handling functionality allows the user to create, modify, and delete welding.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Spooling & Checks > Weld Handling
to display the Weld Handling window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:55
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Click
to identify the currently selected element as the working element.
The Create part of the Weld Handling window allows the user create and define a weld.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:56
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Spec.
Select the radio button to create a weld element from the
current pipe spec. The weld thickness is pre-defined by
the spec.
Config.
Select the radio button to create a weld element from a
common weld spec. The weld thickness can be modified
according to the design circumstance.
Zero Gap
The check box becomes active when the user selects the
Config. radio button.
Select the check box to define a weld thickness of 0.
Fabrication Type
According to Welding methods, the user can select
Manual, Machine, or Orbital, and can define Shop, Site,
and Field.
Create Weld
Creates a weld for the selected pipe with specific options
for Fitting to Fitting Connection and Slip-On Flanges.
Refer to Weld Gaps for further information.
Create
weld
through Picking
Creates a weld by picking the specific element in the 3D
graphical view.
Append
Number
Select the check box, the next available weld number is
assigned to the current weld, by default.
Weld
Leave the check box unchecked for the user to assign the
weld number manually.
Note: The weld number is a unique value. Duplicate weld
numbers are highlighted by application.
The Modify part of the Weld Handling window allows the user modify the currently selected
weld.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:57
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The weld list displays weld information for the welds that can be modified.
Modify the properties of the Weld set in the 3D graphical view
(Shop, Type)
Refreshes the weld list.
Navigate
view
on
3D
Mark Weld Info
Select the check box to display the selected weld in the 3D
graphical view.
Select the check box to display the weld information for the
selected element in the 3D graphical view.
The Weld List part of the Weld Handling window allows the user to export the checked
weld.
18.3.2
Modify Spool
The Modify Spool window provides functionality for the user to define pipe end & feed
excess, loose components and spool limits.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Spooling & Checks > Modify Spool
to display the Modify Spool window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:58
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The User End & Feed Excess part of the Modify Spool window allows the user display
and modify the end and feed excess values.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:59
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Show User End
Excesses
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Displays or hides the end excess values in the 3D graphical view.
18:60
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Set
User
Excess
End
The user can set the end excess values by picking a tube element
in the 3D graphical view.
The End Excess window displays.
Input a dimensional value in the Start and End fields.
Click Apply to accept the modified end excess values, Reset to
discard any changes or Dismiss to close the User End Excess
window. The user is returned to the Modify Spool window.
Show User Feed
Excess
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Displays all feed excess settings.
18:61
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Set User
Excess
Feed
Click to display the Feed Excess window.
Input a dimensional value in the Feed Excess field.
Click Apply to accept the modified feed excess value, Reset to
discard any changes or Dismiss to close the Feed Excess
window. The user is returned to the Modify Spool window.
The Component Attributes part of the Modify Spool window allows the user display and
modify the component attributes.
Show
Loose
Component
Displays or hides the loose component value in the 3D graphical
view
Modify
Component
Attributes
Click to display the Component Attributes window. Refer to
Modify Component Attributes for further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:62
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Modify Component Attributes
The Component Attributes window allows the user to define the attributes for piping
components.
From the Modify Spool window click Modify Component Attributes to display the
Component Attributes window.
Displays the attribute settings for the previous piping component.
Displays the attribute settings for the next piping component.
Loose
Component
Select the check box to specify the piping component as a Loose
Component.
Apply
Default
Loose
Excess
(200.00mm)
The check box becomes active when the user selects the Loose
Component check box, the Offline Component check box must
be left unchecked and the component must be positioned at the
end of a spool.
Select the check box to define a Default Loose Excess of 200mm
for the piping component.
Offline
Component
Select the check box to specify the piping component as an Offline
Component.
Shop Fabrication
Material
Select the check box to specify the piping component as a Shop
Fabrication Material component.
Click Apply to modify the component attributes, Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss
to close the Component Attributes window. The user is returned to the Modify Spool
window.
The Spool Limits part of the Modify Spool window allows the user display and modify the
spool limits. A spool limit can be added or deleted. The spool limit is created with a field
WELD component.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:63
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Show
Limits
Spool
Set Spool Limit
Displays or hides the spool limits for the currently selected pipe in
the 3D graphical view. Each spool limit displays as a filled square.
The user can create a spool limit for a coupling component using a
cursor pick in the 3D graphical view.
The user is prompted to Pick first component or <ESC> to
finish :
Possible spool limit positions display as a square without fill,
existing spool limits display as a filled square.
The user must then pick a second component adjacent to the first
component. The second component is used to decide the exact
position for a new spool limit.
A confirm window displays asking the user to set the spool limit.
Click Yes to create a new spool limit.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:64
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
If the new spool limit is close to an existing spool limit, a confirm
window displays asking the user to reset the spool limit. Click Yes
to create a new spool limit.
The Set Machine Insertion Direction part of the Modify Spool window allows the user
define the bending direction for the spool.
Click Set Machine Insertion Directions to display the Machine Insertions window and
define the bending direction.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:65
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Arrive
Select the radio button and specify the Arrive to define the spool
arrive end as the machine insertion direction.
Leave
Select the radio button and specify the Leave to define the spool
leave end as the machine insertion direction.
Auto
By default, the bending direction is assigned after the bending
check algorithm has checked and optimised both directions.
Click Apply to set the machine insertion direction or Dismiss to discard any inputs and
close the Machine Insertions window. The user is returned to the Modify Spool window.
The Create Multiple Spool part of the Modify Spool window allows the user define a Spool
Drawing (SPLDRG) element.
SPLDRG elements can be viewed in the Fabrication Explorer. From the main menu bar,
select Display > Explorers > Fabrication Explorer to display the Fabrication Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:66
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
To create a multiple spool, from the Modify Spool window, click Create Multiple Spool to
display the Multiple Spool window.
Creates the currently selected Department (ISODEP), Registry
(ISOREG) or Spool Drawing (SPLDRG) element.
Department
Select from the drop-down list to create a Department element.
Enter a Department Name in the field to the right of the dropdown list, the element displays in the Fabrication Explorer.
Registry
Select from the drop-down list to create a Registry element. Enter
a Registry Name in the field to the right of the drop-down list, the
element displays in the Fabrication Explorer.
Spool Drawing
Select from the drop-down list to create a Spool Drawing
element. Enter a Spool Drawing Name in the field to the right of
the drop-down list, the element displays in the Fabrication
Explorer.
Adds a spool to a spool drawing by picking the spool in the 3D
graphical view.
Removes a spool from a spool drawing by picking the spool in the
3D graphical view.
The user can decide to include field or not include field
components into the Spool drawing.
Update
Number
Part
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Creates Fabrication or Installation Isometrics.
18:67
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The bottom part of the Modify Spool window allows the user define the links with
Fabrication Checks and Weld Handling. Functionality is also available to clear all Aid Texts
from the 3D graphical view.
18.3.3
Fabrication
Checks
Click to display the Fabrication Check window. Refer to
Fabrication Check for further information
Weld Handling
Click to display the Weld Handling window. Refer to Weld
Handling for further information
Clear All
Removes all Aid Texts from the 3D graphical view.
Spool Attributes
The Spool Attributes window allows the user to modify the spool name and other
attributes. Functionality is also available to add a new attribute column to the list of available
columns.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Spooling & Checks > Additional
Spool Attributes to display the Spool Attributes window.
CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working element.
The list of spool attributes is populated with all spools under the
current element.
Export
Exports the spool data to an excel file.
Highlight
selected
when
Select the check box to highlight the selected spool in the 3D
graphical view.
The user can add new columns using the ppGetColumnsForSpool.pmlfnc file, located in
the pmlfnc folder. The following example describes how to add a new attribute column,
called Paint, to the list of spool attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:68
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The graphic below indicates the Paint attribute of the PP_PROD_TEST1/PS/001 element.
Open the ppGetColumnsForSpool.pmlfnc file. The highlighted text in the example below
displays the text required to be added to the file.
•
!columns[1] = The attribute name of the spool
•
!columns[2] = The column title for the attribute in the list of spool attributes.
•
!columns[3] = Possible value list or function name which has a value list.
If there is no value list, input an empty string (‘’).
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:69
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user must then reload the Spool Attributes window to the application using the
Command Window, enter pml reload form !!pfSpoolAttributes.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Spooling & Checks > Additional
Spool Attributes to display the Spool Attributes window.
The example below displays the Spool Attributes window with the new column inserted.
The user can add new drop-down value list using the ppGetColumnsForSpool.pmlfnc file,
located in the pmlfnc folder. The following example describes how to add a value list to the
Paint attribute column.
Open the ppGetColumnsForSpool.pmlfnc file. The text in the example below displays the
text required to be added to the file.
The user must then reload the Spool Attributes window to the application using the
Command Window, enter pml reload form !!pfSpoolAttributes.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Spooling & Checks > Additional
Spool Attributes to display the Spool Attributes window.
The example below displays the Spool Attributes window with the new drop-down value
list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:70
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Alternatively, the user can add a new drop-down value list using
ppGetColumnsForSpool.pmlfnc and pfGetValueListForSpool.pmlfnc files.
the
Open the ppGetColumnsForSpool.pmlfnc file. The highlighted text in the example below
displays the text required to be added to the file.
Open the pfGetValueListForSpool.pmlfnc file. The highlighted text in the example below
displays the text required to be added to the file.
18.3.4
Fabrication Check
The Fabrication Check window provides functionality to check pipe models for production
readiness.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:71
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:72
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element. The list of available pipes is populated with all
pipes under the current element.
Validate
Validates the current selection for production readiness.
After validation, all errors and production information
displays in the Check Results and the Details tabs.
After validation, the pipe status is set to ready for production
if there are no errors.
Release
Sets the pipe status to ready for production, regardless of
outstanding production errors.
Zoom when selected
Select the check box to display the currently selected
element in the 3D graphical view.
Modify Spool
Click to display the Modify Spool window. Refer to Modify
Spool for further information.
Weld Handling
Click to display the Weld Handling window. Refer to Weld
Handling for further information.
Select
Default
Fabrication Machines
Click to display the Default Fabrication Machines part
Fabrication Check window. Refer to Default Fabrication
Machines for further information.
The list of available pipes displays the currently selected pipes, together with the fabrication
status.
Right-click to display a pop-up menu of available options associated with the selection.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:73
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Validate Pipes
Runs the fabrication checks against the currently selected pipes
and displays the result.
Spools and pieces are generated after validation if there are no
outstanding errors.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:74
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Validate
With
Pipes
Click to display the Select Fabrication Machines window.
Click OK to run the fabrication checks against the currently
selected pipes with the selected fabrication machines.
Click Cancel to discard any changes and close the Select
Fabrication Machines window.
Set to Manually
Bent
All pipe pieces containing bends in the selected pipe are set to
manually bent.
Select
Default
Fabrication
Machines
Selects the default fabrication machines to be used instead of the
fabrication machines specified by BendMacReference in
fabrication checks.
Refer to Default Fabrication Machines for further information.
Release
Generates spool and piece elements for the currently selected
pipes, the status is set to Ready for fabrication regardless of
outstanding warnings.
Delete
Spool
Information
Deletes fabrication information for all pipe spools and pipe pieces
in the currently selected pipes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:75
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Add CE
Adds all pipes under the CE element to the pipe list.
Remove Selected
Removes the currently selected pipes from the pipe list.
Remove All
Removes all pipes from the pipe list.
Select All
Selects all pipes in the list of available pipes.
Unselect All
Deselects all pipes in the list of available pipes.
Add to 3D View
Adds the selected pipes to the 3D graphical view.
Remove from 3D
View
Removes the selected pipes from the 3D graphical view.
Optimization
Priorities
Displays the Optimization Priorities window. The user can order
the optimisation priorities for the fabrication check. The modified
priorities are temporary and is invalid after closing the Fabrication
Check window. The functionality of the Optimization Priorities
window is explained as part of the process for defining
Optimisation Criteria for Bending and Welding. Refer to
Optimisation Criteria for Bending and Welding for further
information.
Zoom To
Displays the currently selected pipes in the 3D graphical view.
Navigate To
Navigates to the selected pipe in the Design Explorer.
The list of available pipe spools displays the currently selected pipe spools, together with
the fabrication status.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:76
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Right-click to display a pop-up menu of available options associated with the selection.
Validate Spools
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Runs the fabrication checks against the currently selected
spools.
18:77
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Validate Spools With
Click to display the Select Fabrication Machines window.
Click OK to run the fabrication checks against the currently
selected spools with the selected fabrication machines.
Click Cancel to discard any changes and close the Select
Fabrication Machines window.
Set to Manually Bent
All pipe pieces containing bends in the selected pipe spool
are set to manually bent.
Select
Default
Fabrication Machines
Selects the default fabrication machines to be used instead
of
the
fabrication
machines
specified
by
BendMacReference in fabrication checks.
Refer to Default
information.
Release
Delete
Information
Fabrication
Machines
for
further
Generates spool and piece elements for the currently
selected spools, sets the status to Ready for fabrication
regardless of outstanding warnings.
Spool
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Deletes fabrication information for all pipe spools and pipe
pieces in the currently selected spools.
18:78
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Modify Name
Individual spools can be renamed by selecting Modify
Name from the shortcut menu to display the Name window.
In the Name field, input the name for the spool element.
Click Apply to rename the spool or Dismiss to discard any
changes and close the Name window.
Rename Spools
Renames the currently selected spools by using autonaming rules. If auto-naming is turned off, the menu is
disabled.
Rename All Spools
Renames all spools in the spool list by using auto-naming
rules. If auto-naming is turned off, the menu is disabled.
Change Spool Type
Sets the spool type of selected pipe spool. The user can
select SHOP, FITT or SITE.
Zoom To
Displays the currently selected pipe spool in the 3D
graphical view.
Navigate To
Navigates to the selected pipe spool in the Design Explorer.
Highlight
Highlights the last selected pipe spool in the 3D graphical
view.
The list of available pipe pieces displays the currently selected pipe pieces, together with
the fabrication status.
Right-click to display a pop-up menu of available options associated with the selection.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:79
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Validate Pipe Pieces
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Runs the fabrication checks against the currently selected
pipe pieces.
18:80
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Validate
With
Pipe
Pieces
Click to display the Select Fabrication Machines window.
Click OK to run the fabrication checks against the currently
selected pipe pieces with the selected fabrication machines.
Click Cancel to discard any changes and close the Select
Fabrication Machines window.
Set to Manually Bent
The selected pipe piece is set to manually bent.
Select
Default
Fabrication Machines
Selects the default fabrication machines to be used instead
of
the
fabrication
machines
specified
by
BendMacReference in fabrication checks.
Refer to Default
information.
Delete
Information
Piece
Fabrication
Machines
for
further
Deletes fabrication information for the currently selected
pipe pieces.
Zoom To
Displays the currently selected pipe piece in the 3D
graphical view.
Navigate To
Navigates to the selected pipe piece in the Design Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:81
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Highlight
Highlights the last selected pipe piece in the 3D graphical
view.
The Results tab displays a description of the Fabrication Check errors. The check results
display are classified as:
•
Amber = warning
•
Red = failed.
•
i = information.
The Details tab displays all values from the fabrication check. The values are stored in
PPIECE elements.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:82
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Default Fabrication Machines
Click Select Default Fabrication Machines from the Fabrication Check window. The
Default Fabrication Machines panel displays and is populated with a list of the available
default fabrication machines.
When the default fabrication machines are selected, Fabrication Check uses only the
default fabrication machines, instead of using the BendMacReference attribute of the zone,
pipe and branch.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:83
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Select the check box to define the default fabrication machines for the Fabrication Check.
Click Select machines from current element to display the default fabrication machines
available for the currently selected element.
Click Apply to select the default fabrication machines or Back to discard any changes and
return to the Fabrication Check.
18.3.5
Galvanisation Tank Check
The Galvanization Tank Check window allows the user to check the validity of a
galvanisation tank against a pipe spool.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Spooling & Checks > Galvanization
Tank Check to display the Galvanization Tank Check window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:84
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The list of available spools displays the currently selected pipe spools.
CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element.
Select
Tank
18.4
Galvanization
Select a galvanisation tank from the drop-down list to
validate against the currently selected pipe spool.
Check
Checks the validity of the galvanisation tank against the
currently selected pipe spool.
Stop
Cancels the current check.
Drawings
The user can create three different types of drawing:
•
Pipe Spool Drawings. Refer to Pipe Spool Drawings for further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:85
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18.4.1
•
Fabrication Isometrics. Refer to Fabrication Isometrics for further information.
•
Installation Isometrics. Refer to Installation Isometrics for further information.
Pipe Spool Drawings
All of the tasks that a user would carry out that are associated with the creation,
modification, and drawing options and errors of Pipe Spool Drawings are initiated from a
central Pipe Spool Drawing window which acts as a task hub.
The user must navigate to the Pipe Zone in the Design Explorer.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Drawings > Spool Drawings to
display the Pipe Spool Drawing window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:86
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The Create Drawing tab contains a list of available spools that displays the currently
selected pipe spools together with the drawing status.
Add CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element.
Create Drawing
Creates a Pipe Spool Drawing from the selected spools in
the list of available spools.
Refresh
Refreshes the Pipe Spool Drawing window.
Open Drawing
Select the check box to open the drawing when it has been
created.
The Drawing Options tab allows the user to define the options for the drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:87
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Dept. Name
Enter a name to be used for the Department (ISODEP)
element.
Regi. Name
Enter a name for the Registry (ISOREG) element.
Using DESI Hierarchy
Select the check box to use the zone and site elements, in
the Design Explorer, as the Dept. Name and Regi. Name.
elements for the created pipe spool drawing.
Naming Rule File Path
Displays the file path for the naming rule file. The user can
navigate to a different location.
The naming rule file can consist of:
Result File Path
Displays the file path for the created pipe spool drawing.
The user can navigate to a different location.
ISO Template Path
Select a drawing template from the drop-down list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:88
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Drawing Type
Select a drawing type from the drop-down list. The format
and sheet size for determined for the created pipe spool
drawing.
Preview
A preview of the drawing displays on the right side of the
Pipe Spool Drawing window.
The Error List tab displays any errors encountered during the creation of the pipe spool
drawing. To display the error list, select the Error List tab.
18.4.2
Fabrication Isometrics
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Drawings > Fabrication Isometrics to
display the Fabrication Isometrics window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:89
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The Create Drawing tab contains a list of available items that displays the currently
selected elements together with the drawing status.
Add CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element with specific element type.
Create Drawing
Creates a Fabrication Drawing from the selected items in
the list.
Refresh
Refreshes the Fabrication Isometrics window.
Use Hierarchy
Select the check box to use the current hierarchy to identify
source elements.
Element Type
Select the element type to be displayed in the items list from
the drop-down list.
The Drawing Options tab allows the user define the options for the drawing.
ISO Option File Path
Displays the file path for the ISO option file. The user can
navigate to a different location.
Result File Path
Displays the file path for the created drawing. The user can
navigate to a different location.
The Error List tab displays any errors encountered during the creation of the drawing. To
display the error list, select the Error List tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:90
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The example is a created Fabrication Isometrics drawing.
The example drawing contains a Bending Table.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:91
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can define the Feed value, in the Bending Table, as a negative value. Refer to
Defaults for further information. The Bending table is shown only for PSPOOL elements.
18.4.3
Installation Isometrics
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Drawings > Installation Isometrics to
display the Installation Isometrics window.
The functionality of the Installation Isometrics window is identical to the Fabrication
Isometrics window. Refer to Fabrication Isometrics to for further information.
The example is a created Installation Isometrics drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:92
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
18.5
Export Fabrication Data
The Export Bending Machine NC Data window allows the bending machine information to
be saved as XML file. For example, the bending activities of a specified list of pipe pieces.
From the main menu bar, select Pipe Fabrication > Export Fabrication Data > Bending
Machine NC Data to display the Bending Machine NC Data window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:93
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The list of available pipe pieces displays the pipe pieces for the currently selected element.l
CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element.
File
The user can select a file option from the drop-down list.
Select One File to create a single file.
Select By Pipe Piece to create a file for each pipe piece.
Select By Spool to create a file for each pipe spool.
Select By Pipe to create a file for each pipe.
Name
The user can select a file option from the drop-down list.
Select Element Name, the name of the element (PPIECE,
PSPOOL or PIPE) is used as the name of the output file.
Select Date & Sequence, the current date, time and
sequence number is used as the name of the output file. For
example, 20121107235358-1.xml.
Folder
Displays the file path for the created XML file. The user can
navigate to a different location.
XYZ Bending Table
Select the check box for the bending table to show x, y and
z coordinates.
Leave the check box unchecked for the bending table to
show feed, rot and bend coordinates.
18.6
Save Options
Saves the selected options to a file.
Export
Exports the NC data of the selected pipe pieces to XML.
Pipe Sketch Backing Sheet Admin
Functionality is available for the user to create and define a pipe sketch backing sheet.
18.6.1
Create Backing Sheet
To create a backing sheet the user must create a Library element to store the backing sheet
information.
To create a Library element, select Draft > Administration followed by Draft > Sheet
Libraries.
Select Create > Library.
Select Create > Sheet Library to display the Sheet Library window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:94
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element.
Width
Enter a value to define the width of the backing sheet.
Alternatively select a Sheet size from the drop-down list to
the right of the Height field.
Height
Enter a value to define the height of the backing sheet.
Alternatively select a Sheet size from the drop-down list to
the right of the Height field.
Ruleset Reference
Select a Ruleset from the drop-down list or select unset.
Click Apply to create the Sheet Library, Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss to close
the Sheet Library window.
The created Department and Library elements display in the Design Explorer.
Navigate to the Sheet Library and set the SpPurp attribute to PSPOOL.
To create a Backing Sheet, select Create > Backing Sheet to display the Backing Sheet
window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:95
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element.
Backing Sheet
Select a pre-defined backing sheet from the drop-down list.
Width
Enter a value to define the width of the backing sheet.
Alternatively select a Sheet size from the drop-down list to
the right of the Height field.
Height
Enter a value to define the height of the backing sheet.
Alternatively select a Sheet size from the drop-down list to
the right of the Height field.
Click Apply to create the Backing Sheet, Reset to discard any changes or Dismiss to close
the Backing Sheet window.
The Backing Sheet opens as an outline, the Backing Sheet elements display in the Design
Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:96
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Note: Elements below the Backing Sheet are required for the appearance of the Backing
Sheet and are divided into the manageable sections.
The naming conventions used are important as well as the SPURP and FUNC.
Create a Note
To create a Note, select Create > NOTE > Back/Over… Title to display the Create NOTE
window.
Enter a name and location for the note.
Click OK to create the Note or Cancel to discard any changes and close the Backing Sheet
window.
18.6.2
Position and Populate Backing Sheet
The Pipe Spool Drawing Admin window allows the user to position and define the Backing
Sheet information.
Select Draft > Drawing Template Admin followed by Configure > Pipe Spool Drawing
Admin to display the Pipe Spool Drawing Admin window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:97
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Select the Backing Sheet from the Backing Sheet Ref drop-down list to display a plot
preview of the Backing Sheet.
Create / Modify Text
The user can create/modify the displayed text on the Pipe Spool Drawing. From the Pipe
Spool Drawing Admin window (with the plot preview displayed), select Create / Modify
Text, to display the Create / Modify Text part of the Pipe Spool Drawing Admin window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:98
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can enter the relevant keyword and justification/positioning values and click Add.
The process can be repeated for the remaining keyword elements.
The list of available keywords displays all keywords associated with the selected note.
Note
Select the note from the drop-down list to associate
keywords.
CE
Identifies the currently selected element as the working
element.
Keyword
Enter a Keyword for the currently selected note.
Expression
Enter an Expression for the currently selected note.
Height
Enter a Height value for the keyword.
Justification
Select from the drop-down list to define the horizontal
alignment of the keyword.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:99
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Alignment
Select from the drop-down list to define the vertical
alignment of the keyword.
Position
Enter a Position value for the keyword. Alternatively the
user can select a position by picking in the 3D graphical
view.
Colour
Select from the drop-down list to define the colour of the
keyword.
Add
Adds a keyword to the list of available keywords.
Edit
Allows the user to modify a keyword.
Delete
Removes a keyword from the list of available keywords.
Click Back to Main Tasks to return the user to the plot preview of the Backing Sheet.
The keyword controls the configurable text contents on the drawing template. The keyword
for configurable text is wrapped with a ? character, (?matpos?). These keywords represent
the specified data on the pipe spool drawing.
The keyword TEXP elements display in the Design Explorer.
Functionality is available for the user to position the keyword TEXP elements in Modify
Mode.
The properties of the keyword TEXP elements affect the display of the resulting table.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:100
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Graphical Notes
The user can insert a symbol or a logo as a graphical note on the Backing Sheet. A Symbol
Library can be created below the Library element and an existing Symbol Template added.
Symbol Templates are used for graphics that are commonly used for pipe sketches.
The following example describes the processes required to create a graphical note. In this
case a Symbol Library is created below the LIBY and an existing Symbol Template is added.
Select Draft > Symbol Libraries followed by Create > Symbol Library to display the
Symbol Library window.
Navigate to SYTM DRA/MAS/BACKS/LOGO/CADC.
Copy and paste the image, rename to SYTM to STD/BACKS/LOGO/COMPANY.
The AVEVA company Logo is added to the Symbol Library.
Select Draft > Sheet Libraries followed by Create > Note > Back/Over.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:101
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Name /STD/BACKS/ISO-PipeSketch/A4_1/Logo.
Select Settings > UserDefaults and set the 2D Symbols default to /STD/BACKS.
Make sure that the Backing Sheet is open.
Select Draw > Local Symbol and ignore the error message.
Select the Note /STD/BACKS/ISO-PipeSketch/A4_1/Logo from the Draft Explorer.
From the 2D Draughting window, click 2D Symbol.
From the 2D Symbols window Click Create New and navigate to the symbol.
Do not indicate an approximate position on the Backing Sheet, click Cancel to position the
Symbol at 0,0.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:102
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Set the X/Y Scale fields to 0.2 and click Apply.
From the 2D Symbols window, select Position > By > Explicit to display the Explicit by
window
Enter the X and Y positions and click Apply to accept the positional values or Dismiss to
discard any inputs and close the Explicit By window.
Note: Functionality is available for the user to position elements in Modify Mode.
The Backing Sheet contains the AVEVA logo.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:103
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The Symbol Template (SYTM) elements display below the Symbol Library (SYLB) element.
Frame Note
Frame Notes can be considered to be the static geometry and keywords that represent
approximately 60-70% of the Backing Sheet. The example below indicates only the Frame1
and Frame2 notes belonging to the delivered /DRA/MAS/BACKS/ISO-PipeSketch/P4_E
Backing Sheet.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:104
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Select Draft > Sheet Libraries followed by Create > Note > Back/Over.
Name:-/STD/BACKS/ISO-PipeSketch/A4_1/Frame1
The frame is constructed using the DRAFT 2D Draughting functions.
The text comprises solely of titles for the text fields on the Backing Sheet. These can be
added using the Pipe Spool Drawing Admin window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:105
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
MTO Table Note
The following example MTO Table Note is a table that is populated with data from the pipe
spool, which requires additional administrative information.
Select Draft > Sheet Libraries followed by Create > Note > Back/Over.
Name:-/STD/BACKS/ISO-PipeSketch/A4_1/MtoTable
The X and Y positions of the Note must be defined; in this case the values are used to
position the top left corner of the MTO table:
•
X = 10mm
•
Y = 287mm.
Set the SpPurp to TABLE and the Function to MTO.
The creation of the lines and text elements follow a very strict convention:
If this is considered, the MTO table can be broken down into the following elements:
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:106
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Create the four horizontal lines, each with a length of 190mm and a spacing of 4mm. Note
that the FirstLine and LastLine are in the same position.
Create the six ColumnLines.
Note: It is the direction of ColumnLine1 that defines the direction of the rows.
Make sure that the lines have the correct names and are in the correct order in the Draft
Explorer.
Create the 8 TEXP elements. It may be easier to add them using the GUI from the Drawing
Template Administration and then edit the BTEXT attribute.
MTO Table Entries Note
The hierarchy does not list the MTO Tables Entries next, but it has been considered that this
is the most sensible note element to cover in relation to this technical document.
Select Draft > Sheet Libraries followed by Create > Note > Back/Over.
Name:-/STD/BACKS/ISO-PipeSketch/A4_1/MtoTableEntries
The X and Y positions of the Note must be defined; in this case the values are:
•
X = 10mm
•
Y = 287mm.
Set the SpPurp to CELLS and the Function to MTO.
Create the FirstLine and LastLine lines, each with a length of 190mm and a spacing of 4mm.
Note: Note that he lines are not in the same position.
Create the six ColumnLines.
Note: It may be easier to copy the lines from the MTO Table rename and reposition them
afterwards.
Note: The direction of ColumnLine1 defines the direction of the rows.
Make sure that the lines have the correct names and order in the Draft Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:107
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Each of the table entries notes on the Backing Sheet has a reserved area RECT element.
In this case, it is 190mm x 40mm and the origin is in the same place as the XYPos of the
NOTE, top left in this case.
Create the RECT, setting the OCODE (Origin Code) to TopLeft.
Create the 7 TEXP elements. It may be easier to add them using the GUI from the Drawing
Template Administration. Two of them use a keywords recognised by the application while
the remainder use an expression. These can be broken down as:
Matpos
Qty
Cut Length of component.
!!pipespoolcalcexpr('spool','QTY')
unit
The units can be customised.
The TEXP, which is used to represent units on the backing sheet,
can contain special ETEXT.
The value of ETEXT in the TEXP can consist of:
"<distanceUnit>-DIST/<quantityUnit>-QTY".
If <distanceUnit> is "UNIT" or the value of ETEXT is unset, a
distance unit comes the from current distance unit
(!!distanceFMT).
If the user assigns these values, the drawing uses the units as
shown:
bore
!!pipespoolcalcexpr('spool','BORE')
desc
spool.dtxr
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:108
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
ac
Finished Length for component.
When the length is preceded by a '*', the pipe has a mitre or a
thread.
!!pipespoolcalcexpr('spool','AC')
matrno
spool.catref.namn
Note: When using the expressions the keyword used is not important, the keyword must
recognisable by the administrator.
The final step is to set the LVIS attribute of the NOTE to False, so that the elements are
hidden.
Ring Flange
Flanges contain a Flange Allowance value in the catalogue; the value can affect both MTO
and assembly tables.
The example below displays a Flange Allowance value in the Pipe Data Table window.
The user can query the Flange Allowance for the currently selected flange, Enter
Q FLALLOW in the Command Window. The example below displays the Flange
Allowance as 31.8mm
The example below displays an MTO Table indicating the Quantity and Build values of the
currently selected flange.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:109
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The example below displays an Assembly Table indicating the Flange Allowance as a value
of 32, this is derived from the Quantity value minus the Build value.
Bending Table Note
The note is used to represent a Bending Table Title. The process to insert a BendingATable
Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table Note, with the exception of
the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for further information.
The SpPurp and Function values for a BendingATable Note are:
•
SpPurp = TABLE
•
Function = BENDINGA
Bending Table Entries Note
The note is used to represent Bending Table Contents The process to insert a
BendingATableEntries Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table
Note, with the exception of the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for
further information.
The SpPurp and Function values for a BendingATableEntries Note are:
•
SpPurp = CELLS
•
Function = BENDINGA
Note: The LVIS attribute must
BendingATableEntries Note.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
be
18:110
changed
to
False
after
creating
a
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The lines for a bending table are controlled by the purpose attribute value of the STRA
elements for the Backing Sheet.
To add lines to the bending table, define the Purpose attribute value as unset for all of the
STRA elements for the Backing Sheet.
To remove lines from the bending table, define the Purpose attribute value as LINE for all of
the STRA elements for the Backing Sheet.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:111
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The user can modify the BTEXT attribute for a BendingATableEntries Note.
Note: The ETEXT attribute value must not be changed. The attribute is used as a KEY for
codes.
The example below displays the BTEXT attribute value modified to AAA, BBB and CCC.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:112
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The bending table displays:
Note: If the BTEXT attribute value is empty, the bending table displays the default values.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:113
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Assembly Table Note
The note is used to represent an Assembly Table Title. The process to insert an
AssemblyATable Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table Note,
with the exception of the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for further
information.
The SpPurp and Function values for an AssemblyATable Note are:
•
SpPurp = TABLE
•
Function = ASSEMBLY
Assembly Table Entries Note
The note is used to represent Assembly Table Contents The process to insert an
AssemblyATableEntries Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table
Note, with the exception of the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for
further information.
The SpPurp and Function values for an AssemblyATableEntries Note are:
•
SpPurp = CELLS
•
Function = ASSEMBLY
The LVIS attribute must be changed to False after creating a AssemblyATableEntries
Note.
Welding Table Note
The note is used to represent a Welding Table Title. The process to insert a WeldingATable
Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table Note, with the exception of
the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for further information.
The SpPurp and Function values for a WeldingATable Note are:
•
SpPurp = TABLE
•
Function = WELDING
Welding Table Entries Note
The note is used to represent Welding Table Contents The process to insert a
WeldingATableEntries Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table
Note, with the exception of the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:114
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
further information.
The SpPurp and Function values for a WeldingATableEntries Note are:
•
SpPurp = CELLS
•
Function = WELDING
Note: The LVIS attribute must be changed to False after creating a WeldingATable Note.
Endpoint Table Note
The note is used to represent an Endpoint Table Title. The process to insert a
EndpointATable Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table Note, with
the exception of the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for further
information.
The SpPurp and Function values for an EndpointATable Note are:
•
SpPurp = TABLE
•
Function = ENDPOINT
Note: The EndpointATable Note can be removed if not required.
Endpoint Table Entries Note
The note is used to represent Endpoint Table Contents The process to insert a
EndpointATableEntries Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table
Note, with the exception of the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for
further information.
The SpPurp and Function values for an EndpointATableEntries Note are:
•
SpPurp = CELLS
•
Function = ENDPOINT
Note: The LVIS attribute must
EndpointATableEntries Note.
be
changed
to
False
after
creating
an
Note: The EndpointATableEntries Note can be removed if not required.
Removing Connection Numbers on a Drawing
Connection numbers on the drawing are controlled by the EndPointTable and
EndPointTableEntries elements for the Backing Sheet.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:115
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The connection numbers on a drawing do not display of the element attributes are not
populated.
Note: The EndPointTable and EndPointTableEntries elements can be removed if not
required.
Same Scale for Views
The SHEE attribute for the drawing template allows the user to display the drawing views at
the same scale or not at the same scale.
Set the Function attribute to SAME-SCALE to display the drawing views at the same scale.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:116
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Set the Function attribute to SAME-SCALE to display the drawing views at the same scale.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:117
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
Set the Function attribute to unset to display the drawing views not at the same scale.
SpoolInfo Table Note
The note is used to represent Spool information. For example COG, Weight and Surface
Treatment Codes. The process to insert a SpoolInfoTable Note is explained as part of the
process to insert an MTO Table Note, with the exception of the SpPurp and Function
values. Refer to MTO Table Note for further information.
The SpPurp and Function values for an SpoolInfoTable Note are:
•
SpPurp = TABLE
•
Function = OTHERDATA
Note: The SpoolInfoTable Note can be removed if not required.
SpoolInfo Table Entries Note
The note is used to represent Spool Information Contents The process to insert a
SpoolInfoTableEntries Note is explained as part of the process to insert an MTO Table
Note, with the exception of the SpPurp and Function values. Refer to MTO Table Note for
further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:118
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The SpPurp and Function values for an SpoolInfoTableEntries Note are:
•
SpPurp = CELLS
•
Function = OTHERDATA
Note: The LVIS attribute must
SpoolInfoTableEntries Note.
be
changed
to
False
after
creating
an
Note: The SpoolInfoTableEntries Note can be removed if not required.
Centre of Gravity
The Centre of Gravity ETEXT value in the TEXP can be:
!!pfpipespoolcalcexpr('spool','NOGRID;')
ETEXT consists of a position condition and a splitter. For example:
|GRID;,| using a semi-colon (;)
In the example ETEXT is unset or ' ' (blank)
In the example ETEXT is |;XYZ|
In the example ETEXT is |NOGRID;ENU|
In the example ETEXT is |GRIDX;, |
In the example ETEXT is |GRIDY;, |
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:119
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
In the example ETEXT is |GRIDZ;, |
Weight
The weight ETEXT value can be:
!!pfpipespoolcalcexpr('spool','TOT_WEIGHT')
Surface Treatment Code (In/Out)
The Surface Treatment In ETEXT value can be:
!!pfpipespoolcalcexpr('spool','PUINCD')
The Surface Treatment Out ETEXT value can be:
!!pfpipespoolcalcexpr('spool','PUOUCD')
Additional Reserved Spaces
Additional Reserved Spaces can also applied for each of the views that are applied by the
Template.
These are owned by a NOTE element which has an LVIS attribute set to False.
Keywords for UDAs
If the keyword needs to refer to a UDA then the expression follows the format of
SPOOL.:<var> where <var> is the UDA name, for example, SPOOL.:BLOCK.
Bar Code
In order to use European Bar Code on the drawing, it is necessary to download the Free 3 of
9 font from the URL http://www.barcodesinc.com/free-barcode-font.
After font download, the font must be registered with the windows font administration tool.
Note: The Free 3 of 9 font can only be used as a True Type Font.
The user must install the Free 3 of 9 font to \Windows\Fonts folder.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:120
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
The font must then be configured using ADMIN. Refer to Administrator User Guide for
further information.
To access the Bar code font in PDMS, the Font attribute value must match the Font ID
defined in the ADMIN module.
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:121
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Pipe Fabrication
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
18:122
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Index
A
Adjacent field components . . . . . . . . . . 13:9
Assemblies
Application Dataworld
Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Non-Graphical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Pipe
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Assembly
Assembly Area
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Assembly Element
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
World Element
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Assembly Component Rules . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Assembly Rules
Display a Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Perform a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Primary and Secondary Origins . . . 6:15
Assign Bending Machine Reference . . 18:37
Attached welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
Automatic pipe routing
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:47
AWELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
C
Command syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:80
Component
Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9
Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:15
Component Rules
Bore Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:19
Key Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Stype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Components
Pipework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Conceptual pipe rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:42
Create
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
D
B
Backing Sheet
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:94
Position and Populate . . . . . . . . . . 18:97
Bending Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:5
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Bending Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . 18:7
Collision Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:9
Springback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:11
Stretch Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:10
Branch
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Default Fabrication Machines . . . . . . . 18:83
Design Data
Check and Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Index page i
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Design point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
E
Element
Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:7
Existing Branch
Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
Extrusion Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:16
Extrusion Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 18:17
Minimum Distance between Extrusions
18:18
F
Fabricated Pipe Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:44
Fabrication Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:71
Fabrication Isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:89
Fabrication Machine Manager . . . . . . . 18:3
Feature picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:17
Flanges
on routing planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:45
Forced spool breaks
at Branch/Pipe changes . . . . . . . . 13:17
G
Galvanisation Tank Check . . . . . . . . . 18:84
Galvanisation Tank Volume . . . . . . . . 18:21
H
Head and Tail Connections
Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Head and Tail Details
Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Pipework Specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
I
IJOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
Implied joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
Implied welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
In tube weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:6
Inserting a weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
Installation Isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:92
IWELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
J
Joint connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:22
Joint types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
L
Locking
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
M
Measuring a pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3
Modelling Consistency Check . . . . . . 18:49
Modelling Consistency Checks . . . . . 18:27
Modification
Branch Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:14
Branch Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:22
Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:16
Orientate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:28
Orientate Leave . . . . . . . . . . . 11:29
Orientate Offset . . . . . . . . . . . 11:29
Orientate Slope . . . . . . . . . . . 11:30
Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Component Bore and Specification .
11:6
Component Choice . . . . . . . . 11:13
Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:7
Multiple Component Changes 11:14
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:21
Slope Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:23
Modify
Basic Pipe Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Branch Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
Pipework . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Modify Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:58
Multiple mode splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:4
N
New Branch
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:16
Non-Standard Branch Connections . . . 5:13
Non-standard connections
Isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:19
O
Optimisation Criteria for Bending and Welding
18:20
Index page ii
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
P
Packing
on racks and planes . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:44
Packing methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:71
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:71
weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:71
Pipe Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:1
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:3
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:32
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:85
Export Fabrication Data . . . . . . . . 18:93
Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:36
Pipe Sketch Backing Sheet Admin 18:94
Spooling and Checks . . . . . . . . . . 18:54
Pipe gap rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:44
Pipe Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:43
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:44
Flanges on Routing Planes . . . . . . 8:45
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:71
Pipe Penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Hole Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Pipe Piece
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Pipe Racks
Add to Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:40
Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:41
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:41
Conceptual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:42
Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:42
Create and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:35
Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:38
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:38
Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:44
Rack or Plane
Last Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:37
Routing Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:37
Steelwork Structure
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:38
Pipe Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1, 8:8
Adding Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Automatic Administration . . . . . . . . 8:47
Additional Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:72
Attribute Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 8:74
Clash Exclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:57
Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . 8:80
Component Attributes . . . . . . . 8:75
Construct Routing Rules . . . . . 8:49
Delete Routing Rule . . . . . . . . . 8:69
Horizontal Routing Planes . . . . 8:71
Modify Routing Rule . . . . . . . . . 8:66
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:56
Packing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . 8:71
Pipe Rack Rules . . . . . . . . . . . 8:66
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Index page iii
Pipe Racks and Routing Planes 8:58
PML Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:49
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:54
Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . 8:61
Routing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:62
Routing Rules Applied . . . . . . . 8:50
Shoe Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:73
Special Router Attributes . . . . . 8:87
Vertical Routing Planes . . . . . . 8:71
Automatic Administration Placing Pipes
8:69
Branch Detail Window . . . . . . . . . . 8:18
Change Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:17
Component
Locking and Unlocking . . . . . . 8:22
Components
Delete, Position and Lock . . . . 8:19
Positioning and Locking . . . . . 8:19
Covered Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Define a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Head and Tail of Pipe
Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:4
Head or Tail
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Level One Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9
Level Three Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Level Two Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Locked Components . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:18
Minimum Tube Lengths
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
Non-orthogonal Components
Aligned, Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Non-orthogonal Sections
Manually Routing . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Non-orthogonal sections
Unlocked components . . . . . . . 8:23
P&ID File
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:46
Pipe Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Reducers at Bore Change
Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Relative Position
Head or Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Route Constrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Routes to Free Tails . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Routing Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Routing Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Routing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Status of Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:16
Tees
Balanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Work-Points
Head or Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Pipe Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Backing sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:3
Drawing Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:1
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:4
Common Object . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:8
Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:13
Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:11
Log Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:9
Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:7
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15:12
Pipe Specification
Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Pipe Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
Component Picking . . . . . . . . . . . 12:15
Elements
To Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:3
Feature Picking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:17
Merge branch/pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:22
Modify Elements to Split . . . . . . . . . 12:3
Move Component
Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:18
Split Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:3
Split Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:11
Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:13
Split with Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:4
Pipe Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Pipe Spool Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:86
Pipe Spool Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:27
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:28
Pipe Spool
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:29
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:28
Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:28
Pseudo Attributes . . . . . . . . . . 13:29
PML Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:27
Pipe Spool Reporting Data . . . . . . . . . 13:29
Assembly Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:30
Bending Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:32
MTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:29
Spool Extents/End Points . . . . . . . 13:33
Welding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:33
Pipe Spooling
Shop and Field Welds
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:4
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:3
Spool Break
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7
Pipework Components
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Standard Model Library Manager . 6:20
Pipework Spooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . 13:21
Connection types . . . . . . . . . . 13:22
Spool breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:22
Types of welds . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
Weld connections . . . . . . . . . 13:22
Special Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Pipework Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Database Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Database Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Spool Drawing
Change Shop/Field Setting . . 13:15
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:8
Display/Modify . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:19
Forced spool breaks . . . . . . . 13:16
Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:21
Modify > Attached Welds . . . 13:18
Modify > Deign Plotfile . . . . . 13:17
Modify > MTO Status . . . . . . 13:15
Modify > SPLDRG Order . . . . 13:14
Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:10
Numbering Check . . . . . . . . . 13:13
Preview isometrics . . . . . . . . 13:21
Spool Shipping Volume . . . . . 13:14
Spooler
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:8
Preview Isometrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
Drawing Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:3
Pipe Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:1
System Isometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:2
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16:4
Production Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1, 14:2
Automatic Flange Alignment 14:19, 14:28
Connection Command . . . . . . 14:28
Datacon Warning Messages . 14:29
Pseudo Attributes . . . . . . . . . 14:28
PTCA, PTAX, PTMI, PTPOS . 14:28
Bend Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:25
Bending Machine Result . . . . . . . 14:22
Bending Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:24
Database Support . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:25
FMBDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:26
FMBEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:26
FMBPLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:26
FMBSST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:27
FMGRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:26
FMWELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:27
FMWL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:25
FMWSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:27
Fabrication Machine Manager . . . 14:19
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:20
Pipe
Piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Index page iv
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
Renaming
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:18
Individual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:17
Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:7
Setup Production Checks . . . . . . . . 14:4
Default Fabrication Machines . 14:4
Define Auto-naming Preferences 14:5
Define Auto-Resolve Preferences 14:4
Stock Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:6
Spools
Generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:6
Welding Machine Result . . . . . . . . 14:23
Welding Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:25
PURP attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:47
Purposes
Routing rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:47
Q
Quick Pipe Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
R
Real welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
Reducers
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:53
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:19
Routing Pipe Components . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Routing Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:31
Adding Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . 8:34
Bends and Elbows
Locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:35
Components Locking Straight-through 8:35
Components on Plane . . . . . . . . . . 8:34
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:31
Create and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:44
Plane to Route Branches . . . . . . . . 8:33
Use more than one plane . . . . . . . . 8:31
Routing Points
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
Create and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:25
Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26, 8:27
Used as datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26
Routing Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:47
constructing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:49
purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:47
Rule Set
Apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:28
Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:29
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:27
Rules
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Bends or Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:53
Ptr-processing (PRPR) . . . . . . . . . 8:50
reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:53
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:53
RWELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
S
Saddle Components
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . 18:53
Single Mode Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:13
Spool Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:68
Spool Drawing
definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Spooler
Pipe Piece and Spool Data . . . . . 13:24
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:25
Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:25
PML Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Pseudo Attributes . . . . . . . . . 13:26
Special Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Leave Tubes of Welds . . . . . . 13:24
Shop Flag Status . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Welds for OLETs . . . . . . . . . . 13:24
Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:7
T
Tees, positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:11
Threaded Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:28
Toolbar
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Types of joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
W
Weld Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:22
Weld Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:55
Weld types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:23
Welding Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:12
Weldable Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . 18:14
Welding Connections . . . . . . . . . . 18:15
Welding Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 18:14
Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Choose Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
Default Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 17:2
Selection Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . 17:3
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17:1
Views
Save and Restore . . . . . . . . . . 17:3
Index page v
12 Series
Pipework Design User Guide
© Copyright 1974 to current year.
AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
Index page vi
12 Series